Page 1 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual 9500 Microwave Packet Radio WebEML User Manual Nokia — Proprietary and confidential. Use pursuant to applicable agreements.
Page 2 © 2016 Nokia. Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Nokia and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside Nokia without its written authorization. Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Page 3 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual DANGER Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Page 4 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual...
Page 5: Table Of Contents
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Table of Contents Preface ......................41 9500 MPR documentation ....................41 Related documentation .......................43 Naming conventions in the documentation .................44 Audience ........................45 Information symbols ......................45 Contact information ......................46 Technical support ........................46 Documentation feedback.....................46 Safety awareness................47...
Page 6 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedures................63 High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning ......65 Purpose .....................65 Procedure ....................65 High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning ......67 Purpose .....................67 Procedure ....................67 High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning........69 Purpose .....................69 Procedure ....................69 High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning ......71 Purpose .....................71...
Page 7 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual System administration ................91 Log in to and out of system............93 13.1 Purpose .....................93 13.2 Prerequisite ....................93 13.3 Overview....................93 13.4 Procedures ....................95 Administer community string............107 14.1 Purpose ....................107 14.2 Overview....................107 14.3 Procedures ....................107 Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary card ..111...
Page 8 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system date and time ..........165 21.1 Purpose ....................165 21.2 General....................165 21.3 Procedures ....................166 Administer system settings............173 22.1 Purpose ....................173 22.2 General....................173 22.2.1 Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) ........173 22.2.2 DHCP server support ................173 22.2.3...
Page 9 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure EFM OAM..............213 28.1 Purpose ....................213 28.2 Overview....................213 28.3 Procedures ....................213 User administration................217 Administer NE list...............219 29.1 Purpose ....................219 29.2 Prerequisite .....................219 29.3 General....................219 29.4 Procedures ....................219 Administer user profiles ............229 30.1 Purpose ....................229 30.2...
Page 10 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View Remote Inventory ..............279 36.1 Purpose ....................279 36.2 General....................279 36.3 Procedure ....................279 View Event Log ................281 37.1 Purpose ....................281 37.2 General....................281 37.3 Procedures ....................281 Perform debug functions using the Web Server .....285 38.1 Purpose ....................285 38.2...
Page 11 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual 43.5.1 Prerequisites....................351 43.6 SDH to LAG: ...................352 43.6.1 Prerequisites....................352 43.7 PDH to Ethernet: ..................352 43.7.1 Prerequisites....................353 43.8 Ethernet to radio: ..................353 43.8.1 Prerequisites....................353 43.9 Radio to radio: ..................354 43.9.1 Prerequisites....................354 43.10 PDH to Ring:....................355 43.10.1...
Page 12 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Features............427 48.1 Overview....................427 48.1.1 Access Control List..................427 48.1.2 Out of Range VLAN swap ...............427 48.1.3 VLAN remarking ..................427 48.1.4 VLAN swap....................428 Provision equipment port ............429 49.1 Purpose ....................429 49.2 General....................429 49.3...
Page 13 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual 56.2 General....................751 56.2.1 Ring’s Fiber Chain Description ..............751 56.2.2 Aided Cross-connection in Cross-connections panel ......753 56.3 Procedure ....................753 Provision protection scheme parameters ........763 57.1 Purpose ....................763 57.2 Procedures ....................763 Provision Protection Type ............771 58.1 Purpose ....................771 58.2...
Page 14 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual 64.3 Procedures ....................961 Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback ......965 65.1 Purpose ....................965 65.2 General....................965 65.3 Procedures ....................966 OAM Remote Loopback .............975 66.1 Purpose ....................975 66.2 General....................975 66.3 Procedure ....................975 Open and run performance monitoring ........979 67.1 Purpose ....................979 67.2...
Page 15 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual 73.2.1 PDH protection ..................1045 73.2.2 Radio protection ..................1046 73.2.3 Modulation scheme ................1046 73.3 Procedures ....................1048 Upgrade and downgrade radio profile ........1057 74.1 Purpose ....................1057 74.2 General....................1057 74.3 Radio profile ..................1057 74.4 Procedures ....................1058 Upgrade MPT-HL to MPT-HL L1 LAG port ......1061...
Page 16 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual...
Page 17 List of Tables Preface ......................41 Table 1 9500 MPR documentation ...............41 Table 2 9500 MPR related documentation ............43 Table 3 Naming conventions ................44 Administer user profiles ............229 Table 4 Default user account profiles ..............230 Perform debug functions using the Web Server .....285 Table 5 Association of the GExx in the command output and the NE port ..286...
Page 18 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual...
Page 19 Figure 6 Equipment connection to earth..............52 Figure 7 Heat-radiating mechanical parts..............52 Figure 8 EMF emission warning ................54 Figure 9 Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna....................54 Figure 10 EMC norms....................55 Figure 11 Electrostatic sensitive ................56 Figure 12 Electrostatic-sensitive sign ................57...
Page 20 External Alarm Input Setting tab..............119 Figure 37 External alarm inputs provisioned ............120 Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port .........121 Figure 38 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E Card selected ........124 Figure 39 TMN In-band Settings tab................125 Figure 40 TMN In-band Port Enabled ..............127 Figure 41 TMN In-band Port Disabled ..............128...
Page 21 Figure 78 NE Time main menu bar path..............166 Figure 79 NE Time Configuration window ...............167 Figure 80 9500 MPR Web Server date & time setting window........168 Figure 81 NE Time Configuration window ...............169 Figure 82 NTP Configuration drop-down menu ............170 Figure 83 NTP Configuration window ..............171...
Page 22 Open window...................224 Figure 118 Network ElemenT List window ..............225 Figure 119 NEtO Overview window................225 Figure 120 JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen ............226 Figure 121 Favorite icon ....................227 Figure 122 NEtO Overview window................227 Figure 123 JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen ............228 Administer user profiles ............229...
Page 23 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View abnormal condition list .............261 Figure 148 Abnormal Condition List main menu bar path .........261 Figure 149 Abnormal Condition List window .............262 View NE Inventory data ..............263 Figure 150 NE Inventory main menu bar path............264 Figure 151 Diagnosis / NE Inventory window ............265 Figure 152...
Page 24 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 181 L1 radio LAG configuration..............330 Administer synchronization ............333 Figure 182 Synchronization settings tab with Core-E (1588TC license present) ....................334 Figure 183 Synchronization settings tab with CorEvo (1588TC license and Sync In/Out SFP not present)..............334 Figure 184 Synchronization Protection tab..............335...
Page 25 New AUX Cross Connection ..............405 Figure 235 Delete an AUX Cross Connection ............405 Provision Ethernet ports............407 Figure 236 9500 MPR equipment tab: Core-E card selected ........411 Figure 237 Core-E main view: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab (ports 1 to 4) ......................412 Figure 238 Enable/disable Core-E/P8ETH/EASv2/MSS-O Ethernet port ....413...
Page 26 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 256 Provision MSS-1 Sync-In/Out SFP port...........437 Figure 257 Resource list area: P8ETH selected............438 Figure 258 Provision P8ETH SFP ports ..............439 Figure 259 Provision EASv2 SFP ports..............439 Figure 260 Provisioned P8ETH SFP port ..............440 Figure 261 PDH main view (ETSI market)..............441 Figure 262...
Page 27 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 301 Select EASv2 equipment type ..............485 Figure 302 EASv2 enabled..................486 Figure 303 Select slot associated with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to enable......................487 Figure 304 Select MPT-HL/MPT-HLC equipment type..........488 Figure 305 Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver ..........489 Figure 306 Resource list area: Core-E selected............490 Figure 307...
Page 28 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 347 Enabled P8ETH..................533 Figure 348 Disable P8ETH ..................534 Figure 349 P8ETH disabled..................535 Figure 350 Enabled EASv2 ..................536 Figure 351 Disable EASv2..................537 Figure 352 EASv2 disabled ..................538 Figure 353 Enabled P32E1DS1.................539 Figure 354 Disable P32E1DS1..................540 Figure 355...
Page 29 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 392 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node C ........583 Figure 393 Remove Tx mute to Node D ..............584 Figure 394 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node D ........585 Figure 395 Remove Tx mute to Node A ..............586 Figure 396...
Page 30 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 428 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G ....618 Figure 429 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G.....619 Figure 430 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C....620 Figure 431 Node I to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node A ....621 Figure 432...
Page 31 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 465 Node A to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node B.....................653 Figure 466 Node A to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node C ....................654 Figure 467 Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D ....................655 Figure 468 Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on...
Page 32 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 498 NE E to Node D: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E....683 Figure 499 NE E to Node D: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G....684 Figure 500 NE E to Node D: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A....685 Figure 501 NE E to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node A....686 Figure 502...
Page 33 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 534 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross- connection on Node C ................719 Figure 535 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): pass-through cross- connection on Node A ................720 Figure 536 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): pass-through cross- connection on Node D ................721...
Page 34 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 573 Pass-through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (1)....................760 Figure 574 Pass-through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (2)....................761 Figure 575 Pass-through cross-connection: Both end points are outside the fiber chain ....................762 Provision protection scheme parameters ........763 Figure 576...
Page 35 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 613 MPT-HLC transceiver protection type provisioning .........812 Figure 614 MPT-HLC Settings tab for fixed modulation ..........813 Figure 615 MPT-HLC Settings tab for adaptive modulation ........815 Figure 616 MPT-HLC 1+1 settings tab ..............817 Figure 617 MPT-HLC settings with ATPC ..............819 Figure 618...
Page 36 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning ..........883 Figure 660 IPv6 Pre-provisioning main menu bar path ..........884 Figure 661 IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 1 of 3 window ........884 Figure 662 IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 2 of 3 window ........885 Figure 663 Create IPv6 Static Route window ............886 Figure 664...
Page 37 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 705 Example of created VLANs ..............937 Figure 706 Port VLAN configuration - Core-E ports ..........938 Figure 707 Port VLAN configuration - EASv2 ports...........939 Figure 708 Network Configuration screen ..............940 Figure 709 Trusted Managers screen................942 Figure 710...
Page 38 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Figure 737 Performance Monitoring Tool window .............981 Figure 738 Ethernet port PM ..................982 Figure 739 Compression gain statistics PM ..............983 Figure 740 Radio QoS Ethernet port PM..............984 Figure 741 Configure Ethernet counters for L1 radio LAG PM with EASv2 .....987 Figure 742 Radio port PM..................988 Figure 743...
Page 39 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual RF Core Facing Loopback ............1033 Figure 774 RF Filter Port detail................1035 Figure 775 Main Equipment Window: Radio icon highlighted .........1036 Figure 776 Maintenance tab (MPT-HLC shown) .............1037 Figure 777 Radio Maintenance tab................1041 Administer SDH LAG ...............1043 Figure 778 SDH LAG screen ...................1044...
Page 40 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual...
Page 41: Preface
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Preface Preface 9500 MPR documentation Table 1 describes the 9500 MPR documentation. See the current Release Notice for part numbers. Table 1 9500 MPR documentation Document Description 9500 MPR Product...
Page 42 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Preface WebEML User Manual Table 1 9500 MPR documentation (Continued) Document Description 9500 MPR WebEML Provides procedures for performing system operations using the User Manual WebEML interface, including: provisioning, performance monitoring, protection switching, and administration activities.
Page 43: Related Documentation
• ANSI Maintenance and Trouble Clearing • Maintenance and Trouble Clearing chapter from the ETSI MSS-O/1/4/8 User Manual Related documentation Table 2 describes the 9500 MPR related documentation. See the Release Notice for part numbers. Table 2 9500 MPR related documentation Guide...
Page 44: Naming Conventions In The Documentation
Description 9500 MPR Technical Provides technical specifications for MPT-HLC and HLS. Specifications for Full Indoor Applications 9500 MPR TMN Describes TMN networking in the 9500 MPR. Networking Guide 9500 MPR Cross- Provides information about supported cross-connections. connections Reference Tables 9500 MPR-A MPT- Provides transmit power specifications for legacy radios.
Page 45: Audience
Warning statements and notes are provided in each chapter. The following symbols are contained in the 9500 MPR documentation. Danger: indicates that the described activity or situation may result in serious personal injury or death; for example, high voltage or electric shock hazards.
Page 46: Contact Information
Contact information Technical support If you purchased a service agreement for your 9500 MPR and related products from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance. If you purchased an Nokia service agreement, check this link for instructions to contact Support personnel: Web: http://support.alcatel-lucent.com...
Page 47: Safety Awareness
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Safety awareness 1 Safety awareness 1.1 Safety EMC-EMF-ESD norms and equipment labeling This section describes the equipment labeling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
Page 48: Labels Indicating Danger, Forbidding, Command
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Safety awareness WebEML User Manual • “personnel which has adequate technical knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that may occur when performing an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce the danger to a minimum for themselves and for others”.
Page 49: Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed. The symbols presented in following paragraphs are all the possible symbols that could be present on Nokia equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Page 50: Safety Instructions
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Safety awareness WebEML User Manual 1.3.1.2 Safety instructions: Danger: Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: •Personal injury can be caused by -48VDC.
Page 51: Moving Mechanical Parts
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Safety awareness Figure 4 Openings must be covered 1.3.3 Moving mechanical parts 1.3.3.1 Labeling: The warning label in Figure 5 is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts: Figure 5 Moving mechanical parts 1.3.3.2...
Page 52: Equipment Connection To Earth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Safety awareness WebEML User Manual 1.3.4 Equipment connection to earth 1.3.4.1 Labeling: Terminals for equipment connection to earth, to be done according to international safety standards, are pointed out by the symbol in Figure Figure 6 Equipment connection to earth...
Page 53: Safety Instructions
2 meters high). • Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power. Remind persons standing in front of the 9500 MPR antenna may cause traffic shutdown. Place the warning sticker, as shown in...
Page 54: Electromagnetic Compatibility (Emc Norms)
• On the antenna (rear side): EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna Figure 9 Compliance boundaries for 9500 MPR-A transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna 1.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC norms) The equipment's EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out,...
Page 55: Cables
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Safety awareness Figure 10 EMC norms 1. EMC general norms - installation − All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the Customer's “Installation Norms”...
Page 56: Equipment Protection Against Electrostatic Discharges
OSP wiring. Warning: 9500 MPR equipment must be connected to surge suppressors that meet the power surge requirements of GR-1089-CORE. Non-compliant surge suppressors may not have the required secondary surge protection or current limiting function during specific, valid operating states.
Page 57: Cautions To Avoid Equipment Damage
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Safety awareness Workers are supplied with anti-static protection devices consisting of an elasticized band worn around the wrist and a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack. See Figure 1.6 Cautions to avoid equipment damage 1.6.1 Electrostatic-sensitivity...
Page 58: Handling Cards
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Safety awareness WebEML User Manual 1.6.1.1 Handling cards Although the risk of damage to an ESD is reduced considerably after it is assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels: •...
Page 59: Mss-Odu Cable Disconnection / Connection
FAN card completely from the MSS-4/8 shelf. •The 9500 MPR may require two people to support, align, and attach it to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or personal injury, make sure you have enough help.
Page 60: Harmful Optical Signals
•For personal safety, make sure you connect and secure the installation site’s frame-ground (earth ground) wire to the frame-ground terminal on the 9500 MPR before you connect any other wires to the node.
Page 61 SFP plug-in. Verify that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. If there are no danger labels, call the Nokia Technical Support Center (TSC). The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter can cause eye damage.
Page 62 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Safety awareness WebEML User Manual...
Page 63: High-Level Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedures High-level procedures • High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning • High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning • High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning • High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning • High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning •...
Page 64 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedures WebEML User Manual...
Page 65: High-Level Procedure For E1/Ds1 Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning 2 High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning 2.1 Purpose This chapter provides the high-level procedure for provisioning E1/DS1 facilities and equipment. 2.2 Procedure 1. Select action. a.
Page 66 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for E1/DS1 provisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 67: High-Level Procedure For E1/Ds1 Deprovisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning 3 High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning 3.1 Purpose This chapter provides the high-level procedure for deprovisioning E1/DS1 facilities and equipment. 3.2 Procedure 1. Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision. 2.
Page 68 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for E1/DS1 deprovisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 69: High-Level Procedure For Ds3 Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning 4 High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning 4.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning DS3 facilities and equipment. 4.2 Procedure 1. Select action. a.
Page 70 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for DS3 provisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 71: High-Level Procedure For Ds3 Deprovisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning 5 High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning 5.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for deprovisioning DS3 facilities and equipment. 5.2 Procedure 1. Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision. 2.
Page 72 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for DS3 deprovisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 73: High-Level Procedure For Ethernet Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning 6 High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning 6.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet facilities and equipment. 6.2 Procedure 1. Select action. a.
Page 74 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning WebEML User Manual 3. Provision Ethernet cross-connect to new Core Ethernet port: a. See Provision port segregation/connectivity to verify/provision port segregation on Core electrical Ethernet ports. b. See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core Ethernet port.
Page 75 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning a. See Provision equipment port to provision P8ETH or EASv2 SFP equipment port. b. See Provision port segregation/connectivity to verify/provision port segregation on P8ETH or EASv2 SFP Ethernet port. c.
Page 76 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for Ethernet provisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 77: High-Level Procedure For Ethernet Deprovisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning 7 High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning 7.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet facilities and equipment. 7.2 Procedure 1. Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision. 2.
Page 78 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning WebEML User Manual 5. Deprovision Core-E SFP equipment port: a. See Deprovision cross connections to deprovision Ethernet cross-connects associated with Core-E Ethernet port. b. See Provision Ethernet ports to disable Core-E Ethernet port.
Page 79 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning c. See Deprovision equipment ports to deprovision SFP equipment ports associated with P8ETH or EASv2 Card. d. See Disable equipment to disable P8ETH or EASv2 card.
Page 80 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for Ethernet deprovisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 81: High-Level Procedure For Ethernet Lag Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning 8 High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG provisioning 8.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning Ethernet LAG facilities and equipment. 8.2 Procedure 1.
Page 82 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual provisioning b. See Provision Ethernet ports to provision Core-E Ethernet ports. c. See Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports to provision new Ethernet LAG port. d.
Page 83: High-Level Procedure For Sdh Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for SDH provisioning 9 High-level procedure for SDH provisioning 9.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for provisioning SDH facilities and equipment. 9.2 Procedure 1. Select action. a.
Page 84 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for SDH provisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 85: High-Level Procedure For Sdh Deprovisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for SDH deprovisioning 10 High-level procedure for SDH deprovisioning 10.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for deprovisioning SDH facilities and equipment. 10.2 Procedure 1. Disable performance monitoring on the equipment you need to deprovision. 2.
Page 86 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for SDH deprovisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 87: High-Level Procedure For Ethernet Ring Protection Management
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management 11 High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection management 11.1 Purpose This chapter provides a high-level procedure for managing Ethernet Rings. 11.2 Procedure 1. Select action. a.
Page 88 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for Ethernet Ring WebEML User Manual Protection management...
Page 89: High-Level Procedure For Using Web Server
To perform debug operations, go to step 11. j. To retrieve RSL information, go to step 12. k. To perform an MPT or EAS type conversion, see the 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual. l. To perform an upgrade from a Core-E card to a CorEvo card, see the 9500 MPR Hardware Installation and Replacement Manual document.
Page 90 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 High-level procedure for using Web Server WebEML User Manual 3. Administer date and time: see Administer system date and time. 4. Apply a configuration file to the NE: see Apply a configuration using the Web Server.
Page 91: System Administration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual System administration System administration • Log in to and out of system • Administer community string • Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary card • Administer external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card •...
Page 92 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 System administration WebEML User Manual...
Page 93: Log In To And Out Of System
This chapter provides the procedures to establish a session with the network element (NE) and to log in and to log out a specific user to the 9500 MPR. Additionally This chapter provides the instructions to log in and log out of a specific 9500 MPR NE using a web browser.
Page 94 WebEML User Manual • default Gateway The software version of the 9500 MPR NE must match the software version of the NEtO/JUSM/CT. If JUSM/CT is logged into an NE with a different software version, the NE/NEtO/JUSM/CT behavior may not function as expected.
Page 95: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Log in to and out of system 13.4 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To log in using JUSM • To log out of JUSM • To log in to Web Server •...
Page 96: Figure 15 Webeml Icon
WebEML User Manual To log in using JUSM Note: If the software version of the 9500 MPR NE does not match one of the installed software versions of the NEtO/JUSM/CT, the login may fail. This login failure manifests in the following three failure modes: •After clicking OK on the NEtO NE info area, a warning message displays, ‘Start supervision...
Page 97: Figure 17 Neto Overview Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Log in to and out of system Figure 17 NEtO overview window 3. From the NEtO window, enter the NE IP Address or DNS name 4. Click OK. Note: When logging in to an NE running software version R2.2.x and earlier, the log in behavior is slightly different.
Page 98: Figure 18 Neto Login Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Log in to and out of system WebEML User Manual Figure 18 NEtO login window 5. In the Login window, enter Login Name “username” and Password “password”. Click Login. Supervision with the NE starts. 6.
Page 99: Figure 20 Jusm/Ct 9500 Mpr Main Screen Mss-8 Shelf
Figure 21 for an example connected to an MSS-4 shelf. See Figure 22 for an example connected to an MSS-1 shelf. See Figure 23 for an example connected to an MSS-O shelf. Figure 20 JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-8 shelf...
Page 100: Figure 21 Jusm/Ct 9500 Mpr Main Screen Mss-4 Shelf
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Log in to and out of system WebEML User Manual Figure 21 JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen MSS-4 shelf...
Page 101: Figure 22 Jusm 9500 Mpr Main Screen Mss-1 Shelf
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Log in to and out of system Figure 22 JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-1 shelf...
Page 102: Figure 23 Jusm 9500 Mpr Main Screen Mss-O Shelf
Log in to and out of system WebEML User Manual Figure 23 JUSM 9500 MPR main screen MSS-O shelf To log out of JUSM 1. In the upper right hand corner of the JUSM window, select the “X”. See Figure...
Page 103: Figure 25 Close Neto Servers Manager Window
Note: Web Server is available when a Core-E card is in use. When a CorEvo card is in use, logging in from a web browser opens WebCT. For more information about WebCT, see the 9500 MPR WebCT User Manual. 1. In a web browser, enter the radio IP address or the URL (shown below).
Page 104: Figure 26 9500 Mpr Web Interface Log In Webpage
Figure 26 9500 MPR web interface log in webpage 2. Enter the NE username and password (same as the username and password entered on WebEML). The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. See Figure...
Page 105: Figure 27 Web Server Main Menu
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Log in to and out of system Figure 27 Web server main menu To log out of Web Server 1. In the lower left-hand corner of the Main Menu pane, select Logout. See Figure...
Page 106 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Log in to and out of system WebEML User Manual...
Page 107: Administer Community String
14.1 Purpose This chapter provides instructions to provision community strings and log in to a NE with the community string provisioned for the 9500 MPR. 14.2 Overview The Community String (CS) acts like a password to control access to an NE. It defines what community of people can access the NE.
Page 108: Figure 28 Web Server Community Strings Setting View
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer community string WebEML User Manual • To set the community string using the NEtO To set the community string using the Web Server 1. Log in to the NE using a web browser. See Log in to and out of system detailed instructions.
Page 109: Figure 29 Neto Community Strings Request Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer community string 1. Launch NEtO. See Log in to and out of system for detailed instructions. NEtO window opens. From the NEtO Overview window, select Community String request icon in the upper right-hand corner.
Page 110 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer community string WebEML User Manual...
Page 111: Administer External Alarm Points On An Auxiliary Card
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary card 15 Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary card 15.1 Purpose The procedure s in this chapter provide instructions to administer the external alarm points supported by the Auxiliary card.
Page 112: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary WebEML User Manual card 15.4 Procedures This chapter includes procedures for the following: • To provision external alarm inputs • To provision external alarm outputs • To provision external alarm output state To provision external alarm inputs 1.
Page 113: Figure 32 External Alarm Inputs Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary card 5. Select CPI#[1-6] in the resource tree area. 6. Select CPI#[1-6] in the resource tree area. 7. In the User Label field, enter the alarm input label. 8.
Page 114: Figure 33 External Alarm Output Setting Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary WebEML User Manual card The AUX Main View window opens. 3. Click the External Points tab. 4. Click the Settings tab. See Figure Figure 33 External Alarm Output setting tab 5.
Page 115: Figure 34 External Alarm Outputs Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary card Figure 34 External Alarm Outputs provisioned 9. Close the AUX Main View window. To provision external alarm output state 1. Select MSS-4/AUX slot #4 or MSS-8/AUX slot #8 in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/AUX card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 116: Figure 35 External Alarm Output Provisioned On
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer external alarm points on an Auxiliary WebEML User Manual card The External Alarm Point state updates. See Figure Figure 35 External Alarm Output Provisioned ON 8. Close the AUX Main View window.
Page 117: Administer External Alarm Points On An Mss-1 Or
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card 16 Administer external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card 16.1 Purpose The procedure in this chapter provides instructions to administer the external alarm points supported by the MSS-1 unit and the Enhanced Fan card.
Page 118: Procedure
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer external alarm points on an MSS-1 or WebEML User Manual Enhanced Fan card 16.4 Procedure 1. Select action. 2. To Open MSS External Input Point main view for MSS-1, go to step 4. 3.
Page 119: Figure 36 External Alarm Input Setting Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer external alarm points on an MSS-1 or Enhanced Fan card Figure 36 External Alarm Input Setting tab 9. In the User Label field, enter the alarm input label. 10. Select the External inputs Polarity radio button, Active Low or Active High. 11.
Page 120: Figure 37 External Alarm Inputs Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer external alarm points on an MSS-1 or WebEML User Manual Enhanced Fan card Figure 37 External alarm inputs provisioned 13. Close the Main View window.
Page 121: Administer In-Band Tmn Vlan Port
TMN In-Band allows the user to manage an 9500 MPR NE using general Ethernet port from a central location (NOC). In-band TMN messages can reach the 9500 MPR over general user Ethernet ports. In-band TMN messages are supported on all enabled electrical Ethernet ports and all enabled optical Ethernet ports on the Core-E or CorEvo card.
Page 122 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port WebEML User Manual • PCP value between 0 and 7. Default is 7. • IP Routing Protocol: Static/OSPF − When OSPF routing protocol is selected: OSPF Area Number must be provisioned.
Page 123 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port • IPv6 addresses having FE80::/10 as high-order bits (Link Local Addresses) are not allowed The TMN In-Band networking interface IPv6 address must belong to a subnet number different than the ones associated with other TMN interfaces including the other TMN In-Band interface (the subnet numbers resulting from applying the shortest prefix length must not be the same).
Page 124: Procedures
MSS-8 shelf in the resource list area. Double-click on the blue CORE-Main Card. See Figure Figure 38 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E Card selected The Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab displays. 2. Select TMN Interface tab.
Page 125: Figure 39 Tmn In-Band Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port 3. Select TMN In-Band#1/2. 4. Select Settings tab. See Figure In-band TMN provisioning is displayed. Figure 39 TMN In-band Settings tab To provision an In-Band TMN VLAN port 1.
Page 126 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port WebEML User Manual 4. Select Settings tab. See Figure 5. Select the Working Mode Enabled check box. 6. Enter the VLAN ID for the In-band TMN Ethernet interface in the VLAN ID field. 7.
Page 127: Figure 40 Tmn In-Band Port Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port Figure 40 TMN In-band Port Enabled To disable an In-Band TMN VLAN port 1. Select MSS/Core-Main slot #1 in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
Page 128: Figure 41 Tmn In-Band Port Disabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer In-Band TMN VLAN port WebEML User Manual 6. Click Apply. Configuration Update window displays. 7. Click OK. TMN Ethernet interface is disabled. See Figure Figure 41 TMN In-band Port Disabled...
Page 129: Administer Network Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration 18 Administer network configuration 18.1 Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to administer network configuration. 18.2 Overview TMN Ethernet port provisioning requirements depend on how the Ethernet port 4 and MGMT (NMS) port on the Core-E or CorEvo card are to be used.
Page 130: Ospf Area
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual TMN bandwidth is not reserved, which allows user traffic, up to the maximum capacity of the radio link when the TMN port is idle. TMN traffic must be considered when configuring CIR flows.
Page 131 If IPv6 is in use, OSPFv3 is used automatically. Note: When the 9500 MPR is used with other equipment, the OSPF interface parameters of the equipment must be the same as those of the related TMN interface on the 9500 MPR. The 9500 MPR OSPF parameters are: •...
Page 132: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual 18.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To provision NE IP address • To administer TMN Ethernet interface • To administer Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface •...
Page 133: Figure 43 Local Configuration (Ip Address) Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration Figure 43 Local Configuration (IP Address) window 2. Enter the IP address of the NE in the IP Address field. 3. Click Apply. Communication with the radio will be lost. The user must log in to the radio using the IP address configured in step 2.
Page 134: Figure 44 9500 Mpr Equipment Tab: Core-E Card Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 44 9500 MPR Equipment tab: Core-E card selected CORE Main View Slot#1 displays. 3. Select TMN Interface tab. 4. Select TMN Ethernet in the resource tree area.
Page 135: Figure 45 Tmn Ethernet Interface: Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration Figure 45 TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab 6. Select action. a. To Provision TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 7. b. To Deprovision TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 14. 7.
Page 136 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual 10. Select IP Routing Protocol from drop-down menu: Static Routing or OSPF. 11. If the OSPF IP Routing Protocol is selected, from the OSPF Area Number drop-down menu, select OSPF Area Number (0 - 3).? 12.
Page 137: Figure 46 Port#4 Tmn Ethernet Interface: Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration Figure 46 Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface: Settings tab 6. Select action. a. To Provision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 7. b. To Deprovision Port#4 TMN Ethernet interface, go to step 12.
Page 138: Figure 47 Ip Static Routing Configuration Main Menu Bar Path
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual a. For static routing, from the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, select Static Routing and click apply. b. For OSPF, perform the following: a. From the IP Routing Protocol drop-down menu, select OSPF. b.
Page 139: Figure 48 Ip Static Routing Configuration Window (Ipv4)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration Figure 48 IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv4) 2. Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network. 3. Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
Page 140: Figure 49 Ip Static Routing Configuration Window (Ipv6)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual 7. Click Close. To provision IP static routing in IPv6 1. From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Network Configuration>IP Configuration> IP Static Routing Configuration. See Figure 2. The IP Static Routing Configuration window opens. See Figure Figure 49 IP Static Routing Configuration window (IPv6)
Page 141: Figure 50 Ospf Area Configuration Main Menu Bar Path
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration 5. Select desired Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice radio button: Gateway IPv6 Address or Point To Point Interface Index. 6. Which Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice was selected? a.
Page 142: Figure 51 Ospf Area Configuration Window (Ipv4)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 51 OSPF Area Configuration window (IPv4) Figure 52 OSPFv3 Area Configuration window (IPv6) 2. Select new check box (checked). A maximum of 3 areas can be created. 3.
Page 143: Figure 53 Activate Ipv6 Stack Main Menu Bar Path
True or False. Note: When the 9500 MPR is used with other equipment, the OSPF interface parameters of the equipment must be the same as those of the related TMN interface on the 9500 MPR. 5. Click Create. 6. Click Apply.
Page 144: Figure 54 Activate Ipv6 Stack Warning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 54 Activate IPv6 stack warning 3. Click on the Yes button to complete the activation. The menu option changes to Activate IPv4 stack, to return to IPv4. To view IP routing information 1.
Page 145: Figure 56 Ip Routing Information Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer network configuration Figure 56 IP Routing Information window 2. Click Close.
Page 146 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer network configuration WebEML User Manual...
Page 147: Administer Qos Configuration
The QoS Configuration tool allows the user to view the following QoS parameters: • Internal Forwarding Class to Queue Mapping For detailed information on QoS configuration parameters, refer to the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual General System Description, Features, Ethernet,...
Page 148: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual 19.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To launch the QoS Configuration tool • To provision the Queue Scheduling algorithm • To restore Queue Scheduling algorithm default values •...
Page 149: Figure 58 Qos Configuration Tool
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer QoS configuration Figure 58 QoS Configuration tool To provision the Queue Scheduling algorithm 1. Select Scheduler Configuration tab. See Figure 2. From the Mode column, select all Queues to change scheduling algorithm (DWRR or SP).
Page 150: Figure 59 Provision Queue Scheduler Algorithm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 59 Provision Queue Scheduler algorithm 4. Save changes to NE? a. If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
Page 151: Figure 61 Restore Queue Scheduler Algorithm Default Values
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer QoS configuration Figure 61 Restore Queue Scheduler algorithm default values 2. Save changes to NE? a. If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
Page 152: Figure 63 Queue Size Configuration Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 63 Queue Size Configuration Tab 2. Queue sizes to provision? a. If individual queue sizes, go to step 3. b. If copy all queue sizes from one radio direction to another radio direction, go to step 7.
Page 153: Figure 64 Provision Queue Size
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer QoS configuration Figure 64 Provision Queue Size 5. Repeat the two previous steps to provision additional queue size values. 6. Save changes to NE? a. If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
Page 154: Figure 66 Copied Radio Direction Queue Sizes
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual 9. Select the Radio Direction to copy queue sizes to. 10. Click Paste. The queue sizes for radio direction are updated. See Figure Figure 66 Copied Radio Direction queue sizes 11.
Page 155: Figure 67 Restore Queue Size Default Values
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer QoS configuration Figure 67 Restore Queue Size default values 2. Save changes to NE? a. If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
Page 156: Figure 68 Qos Classification Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 68 QoS Classification Tab To provision QoS Classification Criterion 1. From the QoS Classification Criterion drop-down menu, select: Disabled, 802.1p, or DiffServ. See Figure Figure 69 Select QoS Classification Criterion Note: The background of modified QoS Classification Criterion value is displayed in yellow.
Page 157: Figure 70 Provisioned Qos Classification Criterion
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer QoS configuration 3. Click Yes. QoS Classification tab updates. See Figure Figure 70 Provisioned QoS Classification Criterion To provision 802.1p PCP to Internal Forwarding Class values 1. From the IEEE 802.1p to Forwarding Class Mapping pane, select new PCP to Forwarding Class value.
Page 158: Figure 72 Provisioned 802.1P Pcp To Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual 2. Repeat the previous step to provision additional IEEE 802.1p PCP to Forwarding Class Mapping. 3. Save changes to NE? a. If yes, click on the Apply button and click Yes in the Apply Data to NE window.
Page 159: Figure 73 Provision Diffserv Dscp To Internal Forwarding Class Mapping
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer QoS configuration Figure 73 Provision DiffServ DSCP to Internal Forwarding Class Mapping Note: The background of modified DiffServ DSCP to Forwarding Class field is displayed in yellow. 2. Repeat the previous step to provision additional DiffServ DSCP to Forwarding Class Mapping.
Page 160 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer QoS configuration WebEML User Manual To restore 802.1p or DiffServ to Forwarding Class Default Values 1. Click Defaults. See Figure 71 Figure Note: The background of modified parameters is shown in yellow. 2.
Page 161: Administer Software License
• License Key: This field is used to upgrade the license string. To upgrade the license string, copy the code of the new license and click on Apply. The Refresh button activates a new reading of the read-only fields. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information about license key management.
Page 162: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer software license WebEML User Manual 20.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To view SW license using JUSM • To view SW License using Web Server • To update SW License To view SW license using JUSM 1.
Page 163 2. From the Main Menu pane, select License Info. The License Info page displays. See Figure Figure 77 9500 MPR Web Server - License Info 3. View software License String and RMU Serial Number. To update SW License 1. From the main menu bar, select Supervision>SW License. See Figure The SW License window opens.
Page 164 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer software license WebEML User Manual 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Close.
Page 165: Administer System Date And Time
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system date and time 21 Administer system date and time 21.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to administer NE Date and Time. 21.2 General The system NE Time can be provisioned either to the PC/laptop operating system time, manually, or to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
Page 166: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system date and time WebEML User Manual 21.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using JUSM • To provision NE Time to PC operating system time using Web Server •...
Page 167 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system date and time Figure 79 NE Time Configuration window 2. Select Set NE Time with OS Time check box (checked). 3. Click Apply. The Information ‘Set NE time success!’ window opens. 4.
Page 168 Administer system date and time WebEML User Manual Figure 80 9500 MPR Web Server date & time setting window 3. From the NE Time Setting with OS Time field, click Apply to NE. To provision NE Time manually using JUSM 1.
Page 169 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system date and time Figure 81 NE Time Configuration window 2. Select date and time element to set in the Network Element Time field and perform one or more of the following: a.
Page 170 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system date and time WebEML User Manual To provision NE time manually using Web Server 1. Log In to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to log in to an NE using a web browser, see Log in to and out of system.
Page 171 Log in to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. 2. From the web server Main Menu pane, select Date & Time Setting. The Date & Time Setting window displays. See...
Page 172 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system date and time WebEML User Manual 3. From Date & Time Setting window, view NTP Status: Enabled or Disabled.
Page 173: Administer System Settings
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system settings 22 Administer system settings 22.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to administer system settings. 22.2 General The Systems Settings/NE Configuration screen is used to configure the DHCP Server support, Ethernet LOS Criteria, Static Lag Criteria, System Priority Parameter, event and alarm logging, SNMP mode, and retrieve the NE MAC Address/Bridge Address.
Page 174: Ethernet Los Criteria
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system settings WebEML User Manual 22.2.3 Ethernet LOS criteria Ethernet LOS Criteria feature adds the following condition types to the Core protection switching criteria: • LOS of Optical User Ethernet interface • Card Fail of SFP optical module •...
Page 175: Ais Insertion For Lof Detection On Ds1 (Ansi Market Only)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system settings System Aggregation Priority: • [0 - 1 bytes] System Priority • [2 - 7 bytes] NE MAC address The System Aggregation Priority of each System is an eight octet binary number. The System with the numerically lower value of System Aggregation Priority has the higher priority.
Page 176: Ne Mac Address/Bridge Address
Bridge Address field. 22.2.9 SNMP Mode The 9500 MPR supports access from SNMP managers implementing both SNMPv2/ v1 and SNMPv3 protocols. The supported SNMP operating modes are the following: • SNMPv2: This is the default mode. Only SNMPv2/v1 managers are allowed access to the NE for both reading and writing.
Page 177: Latitude And Longitude
• To open the System Settings menu • To provision Tributary Port Configuration (ETSI market only) • To provision DHCP server using JUSM/CT 9500 MPR • To Provision DHCP server using the Web Server • To provision Ethernet LOS Criteria •...
Page 178 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system settings WebEML User Manual Figure 84 System Settings tab (ANSI market)
Page 179 Balanced 120 ohm. 2. Click on the Apply button. 3. Click on the Close button. To provision DHCP server using JUSM/CT 9500 MPR 1. From the DHCP Server drop-down menu, select DHCP Server provisioning: Disabled or Enabled. 2. Click on the Apply button.
Page 180 2. On Main Menu pane, select DHCP Setting. The DHCP Setting window displays. Figure 86 9500 MPR Web Server - DHCP Setting 3. Click on the Refresh button. 4. Determine Current DHCP Status. 5. To change the DHCP provisioning, click on the Enable DHCP/Disable DHCP button.
Page 181 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer system settings 3. Click on the Close button. To provision Static LAG Criteria 1. From the Static Log drop-down menu, select Static Log Criteria provisioning: Disabled or Enabled. 2. Click on the Apply button. 3.
Page 182 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system settings WebEML User Manual 2. Click on the Close button. To provision SNMP mode using JUSM Caution: Changing the SNMP Mode will cause the NE to restart. Caution: When the NE has been configured to operate in SNMPv3 mode, it is not possible to return it to SNMPv2 mode without clearing the database.
Page 183 WebEML User Manual Administer system settings Figure 87 9500 MPR Web Server - Snmp Version 3. Click Refresh button. 4. To change SNMP Mode, click on the Set Snmp version 3 or Set Snmp version 2 button. The NE restarts.
Page 184 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer system settings WebEML User Manual...
Page 185: Administer Vlan Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration 23 Administer VLAN configuration 23.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to administer the VLAN configuration. 23.2 Overview When a Core-E card is in use, three protocols are supported to manage Ethernet traffic: 802.1D (MAC Address Bridge), 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge), and 802.1ad (Provider Bridge).
Page 186: Ad (Provider Bridge)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual In 802.1Q mode all Ethernet frames inside the 9500 MPR network are assigned a VLAN ID. VLAN 1 is automatically defined by the NE when 802.1Q is selected. All user Ethernet ports (enabled and disabled) and all radio ports are members of VLAN 1.
Page 187: Ethernet Frames Processing
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration • UNI (VLAN based): this is an interface at the edge of the Provider Bridged Network. S-VLAN is assigned based on C-VLAN ID carried by C-VLAN Tag or based on User Ethernet port in case of untagged frames (C-tagged service interface) You can change the type of a Provider Bridge port.
Page 188: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual 23.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To open the VLAN configuration window • To provision VLAN Configuration • To create a VLAN or S-VLAN •...
Page 189 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration Figure 89 VLAN Configuration window with Core-E card in use...
Page 190 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 90 VLAN Configuration window with CorEvo card in use To provision VLAN Configuration 1. Provision which VLAN management protocol? a. To provision 802.1D MAC select the 802.1D (MAC bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button.
Page 191 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration Figure 91 VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1D b. To provision 802.1Q virtual bridge, select the 802.1Q (Virtual Bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. VLAN Configuration window updates, the default VLAN 1 is displayed. See Figure...
Page 192 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 92 VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1Q c. To provision 802.1ad provider bridge, select the 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) radio button and click on the Apply button. The VLAN Configuration window updates, the default VLAN 1 is displayed. Figure Figure 93 VLAN Configuration provisioned 802.1ad...
Page 193 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration To create a VLAN or S-VLAN 1. Select New... button. See Figure The Create VLAN window opens. See Figure Note: In Provider Bridge mode, the window is called Create S-VLAN. Figure 94 Create VLAN window 2.
Page 194 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 95 New VLAN created To edit a VLAN or S-VLAN 1. From the VLAN Configuration window, select the VLAN to edit. 2. Click Edit. See Figure The Edit VLAN window opens.
Page 195 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration 4. Click OK. The Edit VLAN window closes. 5. Information window opens, Click OK. The VLAN is updated in the VLAN Configuration table. To delete a VLAN or S-VLAN 1.
Page 196 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual Figure 97 Filter VLAN configuration table 2. Click Filter. The VLAN configuration table is filtered using the text string entered in the Filter by Name field. See Figure Figure 98 VLAN Configuration table filtered...
Page 197 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer VLAN configuration 3. To restore full VLAN Configuration table, click Clear Filter. To export the VLAN list 1. From the VLAN Configuration window, click Export. See Figure 2. Navigate to the directory to save VLANList.csv file. 3.
Page 198 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer VLAN configuration WebEML User Manual...
Page 199: Local Access Control Management
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Local access control management 24 Local access control management 24.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to manage Local Access Control (LAC). 24.2 Overview NE control can be managed by an Operating System (OS) using the LAC feature. LAC management provides a mechanism to prevent multiple users sending write commands to the NE simultaneously.
Page 200 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Local access control management WebEML User Manual 1. From the main menu bar, select Supervision > Access State > OS. See Figure Figure 99 Local Access Control - main menu bar path LAC is enabled. In the status control area, the lock status icon updates to the access denied icon on CTs without LAC NE manager control.
Page 201: Mib Database Management (Backup And Restore)
25.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform MIB Database Management (backup and restore) on the 9500 MPR. A MIB database restore should be performed for catastrophic recovery ONLY. 25.2 Overview Caution: All traffic will be interrupted during the activate database phase.
Page 202: Procedure
MIB database management (backup and WebEML User Manual restore) See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about the parameters that are stored and excluded from the backup file. It is recommended that excluded parameters be saved by running an NE Inventory report, so these parameters may be reprovisioned in the event that the system needs to be restored from scratch.
Page 203 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual MIB database management (backup and restore) Caution: Failure to release all protection switches prior to performing a MIB Management database backup may result in the system being restored to an unknown state. If this occurs, communications with the system may be difficult to reestablish and may result in the loss of traffic.
Page 204 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 MIB database management (backup and WebEML User Manual restore) Figure 105 Backup MIB Management database dialog box 10. Navigate to the directory to save the MIB Management Database. Note: Database backup file name supports a thirty-six character free-form string name. To aid in tracking database backup files, it is recommended to use the NE Name and Date in the backup file name (ex.
Page 205 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual MIB database management (backup and restore) 3. Are forced protection switches active? a. If yes, go to step 4. b. If no, go to step 5. 4. Determine if the active forced protection switch(es) can be released. Release all forced protection switch(es) prior to proceeding with this procedure.
Page 206 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 MIB database management (backup and WebEML User Manual restore) Figure 107 Restore MIB Management Database window 9. Navigate to the directory where the MIB Management Database backup file is saved. 10. Select MIB Management Database backup file. 11.
Page 207 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual MIB database management (backup and restore) 2. Click Yes. MIB Management window opens. 3. Click OK. 4. Close the WebEML window. The NE will activate the restored MIB Management database. There may be a delay of 60 to 90 seconds before the Activate process begins.
Page 208 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 MIB database management (backup and WebEML User Manual restore) 9. Perform either or b: a. Enable the spare Core card. b. Physically seat the spare Core card removed in step 10. Verify system provisioning. Refer to the saved NE Inventory, saved during the MIB backup procedure.
Page 209: Use The Ethernet Features Shell
Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (ECFM) (IEEE802.1ag) is performed using the Ethernet Features Shell. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for more information about the following types of commands that can be run from the Ethernet Features Shell: • Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management •...
Page 210 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Ethernet Features Shell WebEML User Manual 4. Click on the OK button. The Ethernet Features Shell window opens and the CT closes. 5. Enter the commands as needed. See the Product Information Manual for more information.
Page 211: Perform A Software Reset
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Perform a software reset 27 Perform a software reset 27.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures for restarting the NE or an MPT. The Restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
Page 212 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform a software reset WebEML User Manual Figure 108 Restart MPT Select the MPT to be restarted and click the Restart button.
Page 213: Configure Efm Oam
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure EFM OAM 28 Configure EFM OAM 28.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Ethernet First Mile Operations, Administration, and Maintenance. 28.2 Overview EFM OAM can be enabled on any User Ethernet interface on the Core or EAS cards or the MSS-1 or MSS-O units.
Page 214: Figure 109 Eth Oam Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure EFM OAM WebEML User Manual The ETH OAM window opens. See Figure 109. Figure 109 ETH OAM window 2. Choose the Ethernet interface from the list. 3. Choose the Active or Passive radio button in the Link OAM Mode field. 4.
Page 215 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure EFM OAM 3. Click on the Apply button. The link is disabled.
Page 216 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure EFM OAM WebEML User Manual...
Page 217: User Administration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual User administration User administration • Administer NE list • Administer user profiles • Change password...
Page 218 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 User administration WebEML User Manual...
Page 219: Administer Ne List
The Username and current Password must be known before log in can be accomplished. The 9500 MPR craft terminal (CT) software must be installed on the PC. The user must know the IP address of the NE to log in to the system or be locally connected.
Page 220: Figure 110 New Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer NE list WebEML User Manual 1. From the NEtO Overview window, select Creates a new list of favorite NEs icon. See Figure 110. Figure 110 New icon The Network Element List window opens. See Figure 111.
Page 221: Figure 112 Ne List Save Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer NE list Figure 112 NE List Save window 3. In the File Name field, type the desired name for the NE list: <NE_List_Name> 4. Click Save. The File Saved window opens. 5.
Page 222: Figure 114 Network Elements List Window: Current Ne Added
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer NE list WebEML User Manual To add an NE to a List by first logging in to the NE 1. From the NEtO Overview window, log in to the NE to add to the NE list. 2.
Page 223: Figure 115 Network Elements List Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer NE list 1. Click New. See Figure 115. 2. In the table row just added, enter the NE IP address in the IP/DNS column. 3. Press Enter. Figure 115 Network Elements List window 4.
Page 224: Figure 116 Open Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer NE list WebEML User Manual Figure 116 Open icon Open window opens. See Figure 117. Figure 117 Open window 2. Select NE List file name <NE_List.neto>, then click Open. Network Elements List window opens. See Figure 118.
Page 225: Figure 118 Network Element List Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer NE list Figure 118 Network ElemenT List window 3. Select NE from the NEs table and click Set Current. The NEtO Overview window opens. See Figure 119. Figure 119 NEtO Overview window 4.
Page 226: Figure 120 Jusm/Ct 9500 Mpr Main Screen
JUSM 9500MPR window launches. See Figure 120. Figure 120 JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen To open an NE from the current list of NEs 1. From the NEtO Overview window, click the Opens the current list of favorite NEs icon. See Figure 121.
Page 227: Figure 121 Favorite Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer NE list Figure 121 Favorite icon Network Elements List window opens. 2. Select NE from the NEs Table and click Set Current. The NEtO Overview window opens. See Figure 122.
Page 228: Figure 123 Jusm/Ct 9500 Mpr Main Screen
Administer NE list WebEML User Manual 3. Click OK. 4. Click Show. 5. In the Login window, enter UserName “username” and Password “password”. 6. Click Apply. JUSM 9500MPR window launches. See Figure 123. Figure 123 JUSM/CT 9500 MPR main screen...
Page 229: Administer User Profiles
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles 30 Administer user profiles 30.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to Create, Delete, and Change Password of a system user for a specified username. 30.2 General Only a user with system administrator privileges can create, delete and change another user’s password.
Page 230: Table 4 Default User Account Profiles
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual • Maximum Length - Password shall not exceed twenty characters in length • Composition - Passwords must be composed of full ASCII characters (UPPER case, lower case, numeric, and special characters). Two default user accounts are available on the NE.
Page 231: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles 30.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To add a new user in SNMPv2 mode • To add a new user in SNMPv3 mode • To delete a user in SNMPv2 mode •...
Page 232: Figure 125 Profile Management Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual Figure 125 Profile management window 2. Click Create. The Create User window opens. See Figure 126. Figure 126 Create user window 3. Enter the Admin Password. 4. Enter the new User Name.
Page 233: Figure 127 Profile Management Window - With Added User
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles 5. From the Profile drop-down menu, select new user profile: Administrator, CraftPerson, Operator, or Viewer. 6. Enter the new user Password. 7. Enter the Confirm Password. 8. Click Apply. User Creation Success window opens.
Page 234: Figure 128 Usm User Management Main Menu Bar Path
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual Figure 128 USM User management main menu bar path The USM Users Management window opens. See Figure 129. Figure 129 USM Users Management window 2. Click Create. The Usm user cloning panel opens.
Page 235: Figure 130 Usm User Cloning Panel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles Figure 130 USM user cloning panel 3. From the User Group drop-down menu, select the user group: administrator, craftPerson, operator, or viewer. 4. Enter the username of the user to be cloned in the Cloned User field. The new user’s profile will be based on the cloned user.
Page 236: Figure 131 Usm Users Management Window - With Added User
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual The Create New User window closes. The USM Users Management window updates with the new user added. See Figure 131. Figure 131 USM Users Management window - with added user 11.
Page 237: Figure 132 Profile Management Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles Figure 132 Profile management window 2. Select User Name to delete. 3. Click Delete. The Deletion Confirm window opens. 4. Click Yes. The Delete User window opens. Figure 133 Delete user window 5.
Page 238: Figure 134 Profile Management Window - With User Deleted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual The Delete User window closes. Profile Management window opens with user deleted. Figure 134 Profile management window - with user deleted 8. Click Cancel. To delete a user in SNMPv3 mode 1.
Page 239: Figure 135 Profile Management Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles 6. Click Close. To change a User’s Password in SNMPv2 mode 1. From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>Users Management. See Figure 124. The Profiles Management window opens. See Figure 135.
Page 240: Figure 136 Change User Password Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual Figure 136 Change user password window 4. Enter the Admin Password. 5. Enter the New Password. 6. Enter the Confirm New Password. 7. Click Apply. Changing Password Success window opens. 8.
Page 241: Figure 137 Usm User Change Password Panel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer user profiles Figure 137 USM User Change Password panel 4. Enter the user’s Old Password. 5. Enter the New Password. 6. Confirm the New Password. 7. Click Apply. The Change User Password window opens. 8.
Page 242 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer user profiles WebEML User Manual...
Page 243: Change Password
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Change password 31 Change password 31.1 Purpose This chapter provides the procedure for a user to change their own password. 31.2 General The system allows a user to change their own password. Only a user with system administrator privileges can change another person’s user password.
Page 244: Procedure
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Change password WebEML User Manual 31.3 Procedure To change a user password 1. From the main menu bar, select Configuration>Profiles Management>Change Password. See Figure 138. Figure 138 Change password main menu bar path The Change Password window opens.
Page 245 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Change password 6. Click OK.
Page 246 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Change password WebEML User Manual...
Page 247: System Information
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual System information System information • View alarms • View abnormal condition list • View NE Inventory data • Download I&C parameter data • View Remote Inventory • View Event Log •...
Page 248 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 System information WebEML User Manual...
Page 249: View Alarms
32.2 General 32.2.1 Alarm manager The 9500 MPR Alarm Monitor allows the user to view current alarms and a log of alarm activity on multiple NEs at the same time. Both the current alarms and the alarm logs may be sorted by alarm severity. The following is a list of alarm filtering available: •...
Page 250 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View alarms WebEML User Manual The alarms have a different color according to their severity and their state. • Critical: Red • Major: Orange • Minor: Yellow • Warning: Blue • Indeterminate: White •...
Page 251: Web Server
The Help menu displays the Product Version. 32.2.2 Web Server The 9500 MPR Web Server allows the user to view current alarms using a web browser. The Web Server can be refreshed manually or automatically. When the Web Server is configured for automatic refresh the display is refreshed every ten seconds.
Page 252: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View alarms WebEML User Manual 32.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To view NE alarms using Alarm Monitor • To add an Alarm Manager filter • To delete Alarm Manager filters •...
Page 253: Figure 141 Alarm Monitor Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View alarms Figure 141 Alarm Monitor window The Alarm Monitor allows the user to view alarms by severity. 2. Select desired alarm severity from the Alarm Manager resource tree area. For this example, select CURRENT_ALARMS: MAJ.
Page 254: Figure 142 Alarm Manager: Current Alarms Major Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View alarms WebEML User Manual Figure 142 Alarm Manager: Current Alarms major tab 3. To select another alarm severity, either select from the Alarm Manager resource tree area or the Synthesis pane alarm severity tabs. To add an Alarm Manager filter 1.
Page 255 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View alarms 2. In the Filter Name field, enter the name of the new filter. 3. From the scope partition, select the NE to apply the new filter or select the All check box to select all NEs currently being monitored.
Page 256: Figure 144 Alarm Manager Delete Filters Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View alarms WebEML User Manual 5. Click Done to save the filter. Click Cancel to close Add Filter window and discard all selections. Figure 143 shows an example of a timed filter for major transmission alarms for slot 5 direction 1 alarms only.
Page 257: Figure 145 Alarm Manager Save Filters As Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View alarms To save Alarm Manager Filters 1. From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Save Filters As. The Save Filters As window opens. See Figure 145. Figure 145 Alarm Manager Save Filters As window 2.
Page 258: Figure 146 Alarm Manager Load Filters From Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View alarms WebEML User Manual 7. Click Done to save the filter. Click Cancel to close Save Filters As window and discard the selections. To load Alarm Manager Filters 1. From the Alarm Manager Main Menu Bar, select Filters>Load Filters From. The Load Filters From window opens.
Page 259: Figure 147 Web Server Active Alarms Webpage
1. Log In to NE to view NE alarms. For detailed steps to log in to an NE using a web browser, see Log in to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. See Figure 147.
Page 260 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View alarms WebEML User Manual 1. Click Stop Automatic Refresh button. The Active Alarms window stops automatically refreshing.
Page 261: View Abnormal Condition List
View abnormal condition list 33 View abnormal condition list 33.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view abnormal condition list for the 9500 MPR. 33.2 General The Abnormal Condition List is a read-only screen that lists non-usual conditions present in the NE. Events that cause an abnormal condition are as follows: •...
Page 262 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View abnormal condition list WebEML User Manual Figure 149 Abnormal Condition List window 2. Click Close.
Page 263: View Ne Inventory Data
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View NE Inventory data 34 View NE Inventory data 34.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view, save, and print NE Inventory data for the radio. 34.2 General A report file is created automatically by radio software and available through the craft terminal or on the web for customer approval of provisioning.
Page 264: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View NE Inventory data WebEML User Manual The configuration report includes Remote Inventory data. The Remote Inventory List is a read-only screen that lists remote inventory data present in the NE. Remote inventory data available is as follows: •...
Page 265 Diagnosis / NE Inventory window To save NE Inventory data 1. Select File/Save As. 2. Navigate to the directory to save 9500 MPR NE Inventory data file. 3. In the File Name field, enter the file name. 4. Click Save.
Page 266 NE using a web browser, see Log in to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default webpage. Figure 152 Web Server main webpage 2. On the Main Menu pane, select Configuration Info.
Page 267 WebEML User Manual View NE Inventory data 3. Click Save in the dialog box. 4. Navigate to the directory to save 9500 MPR NE Inventory data. 5. In the File Name field, enter the desired file name. 6. Click Save.
Page 268 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View NE Inventory data WebEML User Manual AIS insertion for LOF detection on incoming DS1: Disabled System Priority: 32768 TRUSTED MANAGERS ================ None CORE CONFIGURATION ================== Type: MSS-8, Enhanced, Not Protected, Not Revertive ETHERNET PORT ------------- ** Ep 1 - MPT **...
Page 269 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View NE Inventory data PKT THROUGHPUT BOOSTER STATUS: Enabled ENCRYPTION STATUS: Disabled PASSPHRASE: NOT CONFIGURED QUEUE SIZES: Queue 1: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 2: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 3: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 4: 4034836 bytes (default value) Queue 5: 4034836 bytes (default value) RADIO LABEL: to 130-1.1...
Page 270 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View NE Inventory data WebEML User Manual =================== ** Slot 3 Unprotect SDHACC ** Port: 1 - SFP-O Label: loopback ALS: disabled forced on J0 Mode: disable XC-ECIDRx: 161 XC-ECIDTx: 161 XC-FlowID: 161 XC-JitterBuffer: LOW XC-PayLoadSize: 2382 XC-Clock source: Differential...
Page 271 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View NE Inventory data TMN Ethernet: Status: Enabled ipAddress: 10.0.1.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 Static Routing TMN INBAND PROFILES =================== TMN InBand Profile: 1 Status: Disabled ipAddress: 10.0.3.2 netMask: 255.255.255.0 vLanId: DSCP: 34 PCP: 7 Static Routing Ethernet Member Ports:...
Page 272 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View NE Inventory data WebEML User Manual DS1-Ethernet Connections ------------------------ DS3-Ethernet Connections ------------------------ Radio-Radio Connections ----------------------- Radio-Ethernet Connections -------------------------- OC-3 transparent-Radio Connections ---------------------------------- E1-SDHCHAN Connections ---------------------- SDHCHAN-Radio Connections ------------------------ SDHCHAN-Ethernet Connections ---------------------------- OC-3 transparent-Ethernet Connections ------------------------------------- Radio-Ring Connections ----------------------...
Page 273 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View NE Inventory data SDHCHAN-Ring Connections ------------------------ RING ==== TOPOLOGY: 'HC Ring’ ------------------- eastPort : s1p1 westPort : s7p2 ** INSTANCE: 'Ring 1' ** Enabled : true [R-APS] VLAN Id : 130 MEG level : 7 MEG Id East : 2 MEG Id West : 3...
Page 274 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View NE Inventory data WebEML User Manual - MPTACC plugin Slot 7 SYNCHRONIZATION =============== Synchronization Role: Slave Restoration Mode: Revertive Primary Source: MPT-HC Radio Dir 7 Port 2 Ch 1 Secondary Source: Radio Dir 4 Ch 1 External Signal: DISABLED SSM Wait To Restore: 5 min 0 sec SOFTWARE PACKAGE STATUS...
Page 275 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View NE Inventory data | SSH | ON | |-------------------| | SFTP | ON | |-------------------| | HTTP | ON | |===================| ***************************** * END OF CONFIGURATION INFO * ***************************** ************************* * REMOTE INVENTORY INFO * *************************...
Page 276 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View NE Inventory data WebEML User Manual...
Page 277: Download I&C Parameter Data
• an NE Inventory file • a .csv file for each MPT connected to the NE, showing the RSL information The files can be loaded to the TRDS; see the 9500 MPR Turn-up Manual. 35.3 Procedures This section provides the procedure to download the I&C parameters data.
Page 278 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Download I&C parameter data WebEML User Manual The files are downloaded.
Page 279: View Remote Inventory
View Remote Inventory 36 View Remote Inventory 36.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view remote inventory list for the 9500 MPR. 36.2 General The Remote Inventory List is a read-only screen that lists remote inventory data present in the NE. Remote inventory data available is as follows: •...
Page 280 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View Remote Inventory WebEML User Manual Figure 155 Remote Inventory main menu bar path The Remote Inventory View window opens. Figure 156 Remote Inventory View window 2. Close view, click x.
Page 281: View Event Log
View Event Log 37 View Event Log 37.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to view event log for the 9500 MPR. 37.2 General The event log allows the user to capture a sequence of events which occurred over time, which may be helpful in diagnosing problems occurring within the NE and/or network.
Page 282 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View Event Log WebEML User Manual Figure 157 Event Log Main Menu Bar Path The Event Log Browser window opens. See Figure 158. Figure 158 Event Log Browser Window To Export an Event Log 1.
Page 283 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual View Event Log 2. Select Output Format: HTML, CSV, PDF, or XML. 3. Select which export entries to export: All Entries, or Selection. 4. Click OK. The Save window opens. 5.
Page 284 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 View Event Log WebEML User Manual...
Page 285: Perform Debug Functions Using The Web Server
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Perform debug functions using the Web Server 38 Perform debug functions using the Web Server 38.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures for performing debug functions using the Web Server interface. 38.2 General The Debug Info menu allows the operator to analyze Ethernet traffic using a web browser.
Page 286: Table 5 Association Of The Gexx In The Command Output And The Ne Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform debug functions using the Web Server WebEML User Manual • L2 show: lists all the MAC addresses and associated VLANs learned by the NE (the list includes static entries self-defined by NE). •...
Page 287: Procedure
1. Log In to NE. For detailed steps to log in to an NE using a web browser, see in to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. 2. Select Administration → Debug Info and select a command from the pull down...
Page 288 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform debug functions using the Web Server WebEML User Manual Figure 159 Debug info 3. Select either “Run command” or “Run command to File”. “Run command” provides the output on the web page. “Run command to file” provides the output on the web page and also saves the output on a file.
Page 289: Retrieve Rsl Information Using The Web Server
1. Log In to NE. For detailed steps to log in to an NE using a web browser, see in to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. 2. Select Administration → Retrieve RSL Info. The Radio Signal Level Retrieval screen opens.
Page 290 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Retrieve RSL information using the Web Server WebEML User Manual...
Page 291: Equipment Provisioning And Deprovisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Equipment provisioning and deprovisioning Equipment provisioning and depro- visioning Note: Performance monitoring on affected equipment should be disabled before making configuration changes. • Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) • Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports •...
Page 292 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Equipment provisioning and deprovisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 293: Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (Erp)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 40 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 40.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP). 40.2 General Use the procedures in this chapter to modify ERP provisioning parameters. For detailed instruction to provision an Ethernet Ring, see Provision Ethernet Ring Protection...
Page 294 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual • R-APS MEG ID East: [1 to 16]; R-APS MEG ID East identifier is the ID of the east end of the ring link and must be configured to the same value as the corresponding R-APS MEG ID West value for the west end of the ring link (ex.
Page 295: Delete Ring Topology
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 40.2.2 Delete ring topology Ring topology can be deleted only when the following conditions exist: • If no cross-connections are configured on either ERP Instance associated with the Ring Topology.
Page 296 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual • To add a VLAN to an ERP Instance • To provision the Hold off timer • To delete VLAN IDs from an ERP Instance •...
Page 297 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) To enable an ERP Instance 1. From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to enable. See Figure 161. 2. Select ERP Enabled check box (checked). 3.
Page 298 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual Figure 162 Modify ERP Instance with ERP Instance enabled To modify ERP Instance parameters which require the ERP Instance disabled 1. From the ERP Instance area, select ERP instance to modify. See Figure 161.
Page 299 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) e. For Ring Node which is RPL Owner, select RPL Owner check box (checked), for Ring Nodes which are not RPL Owner, RPL Owner check box (unchecked), if applicable.
Page 300 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual 2. Modify or Delete Ethernet Flow from VLAN Configuration. For detailed steps to modify or delete VLAN Ethernet Flow, see Administer VLAN configuration. 3. Delete VLAN IDs from Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to delete PDH, Radio, Eth, and Pass-Through to Ring cross-connections, see Deprovision cross connections.
Page 301 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) e. Click Apply. Figure 164 Add VLAN IDs to ERP Instance 2. Add VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add PDH, Radio, Eth, and Pass-Through to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
Page 302 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual Figure 165 Delete VLAN IDs from ERP Instance To add a VLAN to an ERP Instance 1. Add VLAN Ethernet flows to ERP Instance using the following procedure: Figure 164 for the following steps: a.
Page 303 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 1. Provision the Hold Off timer for any Ethernet ports in the ERP Instance. For detailed steps, see Provision Ethernet ports. To force a Ring protection switch 1.
Page 304 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual...
Page 305: Administer L1/L2 Radio And L2 Ethernet Lag Ports
S-VLAN. For a detailed description of LAG, including port membership rules, see the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual. 41.2.1 Provider bridge parameters If the NE is in Provider Bridge mode, LAG ports can be configured as NNI, UNI (port- based) or UNI (VLAN-based).
Page 306 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports • The S-VLAN TPID selects the service instance associated to the port for untagged and C-VLAN priority-tagged frames. The port must be in the untagged set of the S-VLAN.
Page 307: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports 41.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To launch the LAG Configuration tool • To provision an L1 Radio LAG port •...
Page 308 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 167 LAG Configuration tool To provision an L1 Radio LAG port 1. Using the craft terminal, verify all radio ports, to be members of the L1 Radio LAG port, are provisioned correctly.
Page 309 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports 2. Using the craft terminal, verify all radio ports, to be members of the L1 Radio LAG port, are not associated with the following: a.
Page 310 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Note: For a detailed procedure to provision PPP RF Configuration, see To administer PPP configuration. 7. Click Apply. 8. From the LAG Information pane, select the Enabled check box (checked). 9.
Page 311 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports 2. Using the craft terminal, verify all radio ports, to be members of the L2 Radio LAG port, are not associated with the following: −...
Page 312 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports 9. Verify L2 Radio LAG port provisioning. To provision an L2 Ethernet LAG port 1. Using the craft terminal, verify all user Ethernet ports to be members of the L2 Ethernet LAG port are provisioned the same.
Page 313 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Note: For a detailed procedure to provision VLAN Configuration, see Administer VLAN configuration, step 5. 7. From the LAG Information pane Hash drop-down menu, select hashing level: (L2 or L3).
Page 314 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 168 LAG Creation window L1 Radio LAG Create L2 Radio LAG Create L2 Ethernet LAG Create viii 22900 2. Create a LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 168.
Page 315 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Figure 169 L2 Ethernet LAG created To add Ethernet or radio ports to LAG port 1. Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, add Ethernet/Radio ports to LAG port using the following procedure: To add L1 Radio port to LAG port, see Figure...
Page 316 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 170 Add radio ports to L1 radio LAG 25223...
Page 317 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Figure 171 Add radio ports to L2 radio LAG 22903...
Page 318 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 172 Add Ethernet ports to Ethernet LAG 22901 i. From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to add port. ii. If LAG Type is provisioned L2 Radio, then from the Available Ports pane, select Radio port type (MPT).
Page 319 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports To remove L2 Ethernet port from LAG port, see Figure 175. Note: To remove the last port member of a LAG, the LAG port must first be disabled. Figure 173 Remove L1 radio ports from LAG port viii...
Page 320 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 174 Remove L2 radio ports from LAG port 22903...
Page 321 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Figure 175 Remove Ethernet ports from LAG port viii 22909 i. From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to remove ports. ii. If last L1/L2 Radio LAG port and PPP RF is enabled, then from the PPP RF pane, select the Enabled check box (unchecked).
Page 322 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports To enable a LAG port 1. Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, enable LAG port using the following procedure: See Figure 176.
Page 323 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Note: To disable a LAG port, all cross-connections, VLANs, and Port segregation, synchronization reference provisioning must be removed from the LAG port. If the L2 Ethernet LAG port is configured as UNI (VLAN-Based) in Provider Bridge mode, to disable a LAG port, Ingress C-VLAN / S-VLAN Mappings must be removed.
Page 324 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 177 Provider bridge tab 23656 iv. Configure port type parameters: • for NNI, choose the S-VLAN TPID from the drop-down menu •...
Page 325 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Figure 178 Administer Ethernet LAG VLAN configuration 22902 i. From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to administer VLAN Configuration. ii. From the VLAN Configuration pane, in the Acceptable Frame Types field, select: (admit all or admit tagged only).
Page 326 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports − Port Segregation − VLANs − If L1 radio LAG port, synchronization reference − If L1 radio LAG port, PPP RF enabled −...
Page 327 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Note: The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed at LAG level and not at ODU level. Note: In applications with two parallel LAG groups, the PPP rules are the same as for Nx(1+0) and Nx(1+1).
Page 328 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Note: OSPF Area must be provisioned prior to provisioning PPP RF channel. v. Click Apply. 3. Disable PPP RF on radio LAG port Using the LAG Configuration Tool Settings tab, disable PPP RF configuration using the following procedure: See Figure...
Page 329 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports Figure 180 Provision hashing level for L2 Ethernet/radio LAG port 22910 i. From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to provision hashing level. ii.
Page 330: Figure 181 L1 Radio Lag Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports Figure 181 L1 radio LAG configuration i. From the Configured LAGs pane, select LAG to enable SSM support. ii. From the SSM pane, select Enabled check box (checked). iii.
Page 331 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG ports i. From the Configured LAGs pane, select the LAG to enable PTB. ii. From the PTB pane, select the Enabled check box (checked). iii.
Page 332 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer L1/L2 radio and L2 Ethernet LAG WebEML User Manual ports...
Page 333: Administer Synchronization
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization 42 Administer synchronization 42.1 Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to administer NE synchronization. 42.2 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: • To view synchronization provisioning •...
Page 334: Figure 182 Synchronization Settings Tab With Core-E (1588Tc License Present)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual Figure 182 Synchronization settings tab with Core-E (1588TC license present) Figure 183 Synchronization settings tab with CorEvo (1588TC license and Sync In/Out SFP not present)
Page 335: Figure 184 Synchronization Protection Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization To view Synchronization Protection Scheme 1. Select Protection Schemes tab. 2. Select Synchronization Protection in the resource tree area. Synchronization Protection tab displays. See Figure 184. The Primary/Secondary row displays details regarding the synchronization source.
Page 336: Figure 185 1588 Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual To enable 1588 Transparent Clock 1. Select Synchronization tab. 2. Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area. 3. Select the 1588 tab in the resource detail area. The 1588 tab displays.
Page 337 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization 2. Select Synchronization Source in the resource tree area. 3. Select the Settings tab in the resource detail area. Synchronization Settings tab displays. See Figure 182. 4. Select the Master radio button in the Role partition. 5.
Page 338 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual 11. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 12. Select Secondary Source radio button: Free Run Local Oscillator, E1/DS1 Port, Sync-In Port, Eth Port, STM-1/OC-3 port, or None. 13.
Page 339: Figure 186 Sync Ports With Sync-In/Out Sfp
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization Figure 186 Sync Ports with Sync-In/Out SFP 22. Go to step 29. 23. From the E1/DS1 Port drop-down menu, select the E1/DS1 Port. 24. Go to step 29. 25.
Page 340: Figure 187 Synchronization - Master / Revertive
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual 32. Click Apply. Figure 187 Synchronization - Master / Revertive To provision Synchronization — Slave 1. Select the Synchronization tab. 2. Click the Synchronization Source in the resource tree area. 3.
Page 341 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization c. If Eth Port, go to step 13. 7. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync-In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs.
Page 342 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual 16. In the Sync Ports partition, from the Sync In port drop-down menu, select the Sync-In Port frequency: 1.024 MHz, 2.048 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. Note: If a Sync-In/Out SFP is in use, the Sync Ports area is labeled Sync In/Out SFPs.
Page 343: Figure 188 Synchronization - Slave / Revertive
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization 28. In the Wait-To-Restore time entry boxes select the wait to restore time in minutes (min.) [0-12] and seconds (sec.) [0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50]. 29. Click Apply. Figure 188 Synchronization - Slave / Revertive To view Radio Channel SSM Support summary...
Page 344: Figure 189 Ssm Summary Table
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual Figure 189 SSM Summary table 5. View SSM provisioning status. 6. Close SSM Summary Table. To provision Radio Channel SSM support 1. Select Equipment tab. 2. Select Radio Direction to provision SSM support in the resource tree area. For MPT-HL radio direction, select MPT-HL Dir#-Ch#.
Page 345: Figure 190 Mpt-Hl Radio Channel Additional Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Administer synchronization Figure 190 MPT-HL Radio Channel Additional Settings tab 5. Provision radio channel SSM? a. To enable SSM, go to step 6. b. To disable SSM, go to step 8. c.
Page 346 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Administer synchronization WebEML User Manual...
Page 347: Provision Cross Connections
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 43 Provision cross connections 43.1 Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to provision cross connections from the Cross Connections screen. For AUX cross-connections, see Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only).
Page 348: Figure 191 Mss-4/8 Cross-Connections Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 191 MSS-4/8 Cross-Connections screen The cross connections screen (MSS-1) is used to configure switching of packetized data through the MSS-1 Core ports. See Figure 192 for an example of the MSS-1 Cross Connections screen.
Page 349: Pdh To Radio
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Figure 192 MSS-1 Cross-Connections screen 43.3 PDH to radio: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core card is Active.
Page 350: Sdh To Radio
The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when one of the termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant.
Page 351: Sdh To Ring
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Verify appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
Page 352: Sdh To Lag
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 43.6 SDH to LAG: Caution: In the protected Core configuration, entering SDH cross-connections while the spare Core is Active may affect existing SDH cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision SDH cross-connections while the main Core card is Active.
Page 353: Prerequisites
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 354: Radio To Radio
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual Verify appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports.
Page 355: Pdh To Ring
The Service Profile on each E1/DS1/DS3 card Settings screen must be set to TDM2ETH for each E1/DS1/DS3 cross connect when one of the termination points of the E1/DS1/DS3 circuit are terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant.
Page 356: Radio To Ring
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 43.11 Radio to Ring: Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 357: Prerequisites
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 43.12.1 Prerequisites The Ethernet port (Core) and Ring port (destination) must be enabled on the respective Core card and Ethernet Ring Protection Configuration provisioning screens. Verify appropriate port segregation is provisioned to prevent message flooding. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE.
Page 358: Icon Shapes
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual For information about Ring cross-connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring, see Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring. 43.13.1.1 Icon shapes The shape of the icon identifies the port types available in the slot as follows: RADIO (Core/MPT ODU/MPT-HL/HLC/HLS/MSS-CORE), PDH (P32E1DS1/P2E3DS3 cards), ETH (Ethernet) one of six connectors on the Core-E card, one of eight connectors on the EAS or CorEvo card, ETH LAG (Ethernet LAG), RADIO LAG...
Page 359: Line Colors
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 43.13.3 Line colors The drag and drop line, the operator inserts, between icons indicates an electrical connection. The color of the line indicates type of data and direction; see Figure 194.
Page 360: Mouse Operation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 43.14 Mouse operation 43.14.1 Single right-click icon A single right button click on an icon highlights (selects) the resource and opens up an information window. Figure 195 Cross Connection: single right-click icon detail 43.14.2 Double-click on the line A double-click on a line selects the resource and opens up an information window.
Page 361: Double Right-Click On The Line
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Figure 196 Cross Connection: double left-click line detail 43.14.3 Double right-click on the line A double right button click on a line selects the resource and opens up an information window.
Page 362: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 43.15 Procedures Caution: Entering E1/DS1 cross-connections while the spare Core card is Active may affect existing E1/DS1 cross-connections. To prevent this from occurring, ONLY provision E1/DS1 cross-connections while the main Core is Active. This section provides the following procedures: •...
Page 363: Figure 198 Configuration Cross Connection Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Figure 198 Configuration Cross Connection window Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 364: Figure 199 Pdh-Radio Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 199 PDH-RADIO Cross Connection 2. On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, select check box for all Flow ID numbers to be cross connected. 3. On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, click OK. 4.
Page 365: Figure 200 Pdh To Ethernet Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 1. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
Page 366 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 5. On the PDH-ETH pop-up, click OK. 6. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 7. From the Connections tab, verify the PDH-ETH cross-connection was entered correctly. To provision an SDH to Radio Cross connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends...
Page 367: Figure 201 Sdh-Radio Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Figure 201 SDH-RADIO Cross Connection 3. On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, verify the Flow ID number to be cross connected. 4. On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, click OK. 5. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 6.
Page 368: Figure 202 Sdh-Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 1. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. Also port segregation should be provisioned between the radio port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
Page 369: Figure 203 Sdh To Lag Configuration Dialog
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 7. From the Connections tab, verify the SDH_RING cross-connection was entered correctly. To provision an SDH to LAG Cross connection 1. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE.
Page 370: Figure 204 Completed Sdh To Lag Cross-Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 3. On the STM-1_RADIO LAG pop-up, click OK. The completed cross-connection appears (see Figure 204). The priority of the SDH flows must be configured in the LAG; see Administer LAG.
Page 371: Figure 205 Ethernet To Radio Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 1. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the Ethernet port and all other parallel radio ports.
Page 372 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 4. From the Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH. 5. Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a. If yes, go to step 6. b. If no, go to step 7. 6.
Page 373: Figure 206 Radio (P8Eth) To Radio (P8Eth) Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 2. Select Radio port and drag and draw line to Radio port. RADIO-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 206. Figure 206 Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (P8ETH) Cross Connection...
Page 374: Figure 207 Radio (P8Eth) To Radio (Mptacc) Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 207 Radio (P8ETH) to Radio (MPTACC) Cross Connection 3. On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, enter Flow ID number for the far-end in the Flow ID field. Note: Ranging is supported for RADIO-RADIO cross-connection entry. 4.
Page 375 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 8. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 9. From the Connections tab, verify the RADIO-RADIO cross-connections were entered correctly. To provision a PDH to Ring Cross Connection Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 376: Figure 208 Pdh To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 208 PDH to RING Cross Connection 3. On the PDH-RING pop-up, select the ERP Instance to be cross connected. 4. On the PDH-RING pop-up, select the check boxes for all Flow ID numbers to be cross-connected.
Page 377: Figure 209 Radio To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections 1. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between parallel radio paths at both ends when they exist on the NE. When making a cross connection to one of parallel radio ports, port segregation should also be provisioned between the radio port and all other parallel radio ports.
Page 378 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual Note: Ranging is supported for RADIO-RING cross-connection entry. 5. From the Service Profile drop-down menu, select TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH. 6. Is the Profile configured with TDM2ETH? a. If yes, go to step 7. b.
Page 379: Figure 210 Ethernet To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. Provision port segregation/connectivity for detailed steps to view/provision port segregation. 2. Select ETH port and drag to draw line to Ring port. ETH-RING pop-up displays.
Page 380 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 7. Enter the destination MAC address where the Ethernet flow will be terminated in the MAC Address field. Note: The first two digits of the destination MAC address for unprotected ports must be set to ‘unicast’...
Page 381: Figure 211 Ring To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections Figure 211 Ring to Ring Cross Connection 2. On the RING-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to be cross connected. 3. On the RING-RING pop-up, select Flow ID number in the Available VLANs field. Note: Ranging is supported for RADIO-RADIO cross-connection entry.
Page 382 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections WebEML User Manual 8. Repeat steps through to provision additional Ring to Ring cross-connections on this ERP Instance. 9. On the RING-RING pop-up, click OK. 10. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. 11.
Page 383: Deprovision Cross Connections
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision cross connections 44 Deprovision cross connections 44.1 Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to deprovision cross connections. Note: The figures in this chapter show the MSS-8 cross-connection screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Page 384: Figure 212 Cross Connection Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 212 Cross Connection window To deprovision a PDH to Radio cross connect 1. Double-click on the PDH to RADIO line. PDH-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 213. Figure 213 PDH-RADIO cross connection...
Page 385: Figure 214 Pdh To Ethernet Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision cross connections 2. On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned. 3. On the PDH_RADIO pop-up, click OK. 4. On the Cross Connection screen, click Apply. To deprovision a PDH to Ethernet cross connection 1.
Page 386: Figure 215 Stm-1(Oc-3)-Radio Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision cross connections WebEML User Manual STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO pop-up displays. See Figure 215. Figure 215 STM-1(OC-3)-RADIO cross connection 2. On the STM-1(OC-3)_RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for the cross connect to be deprovisioned. 3.
Page 387: Figure 216 Ethernet To Radio Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision cross connections RADIO-ETH pop-up displays. See Figure 216. Figure 216 Ethernet to Radio cross connection 2. On the RADIO-ETH pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
Page 388: Figure 217 Radio To Radio Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 217 Radio to Radio cross connection 2. On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned. 3. On the RADIO-RADIO pop-up, click OK. 4.
Page 389: Figure 218 Pdh To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision cross connections Figure 218 PDH to RING cross connection 2. On the PDH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection. 3. On the PDH-RING pop-up, select Flow ID check box (unchecked) for all cross connects to be deprovisioned.
Page 390: Figure 219 Radio To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 219 Radio to Ring cross connection 2. On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection. 3. On the RADIO-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned.
Page 391: Figure 220 Ethernet To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision cross connections Figure 220 Ethernet to Ring cross connection 2. On the ETH-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection. 3. On the ETH-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned. 4.
Page 392: Figure 221 Ring To Ring Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision cross connections WebEML User Manual Figure 221 Ring to Ring cross connection 2. On the RING-RING pop-up, select ERP Instance to deprovision cross connection. 3. On the RING-RING pop-up, select Crossconnected VLANs to be deprovisioned. 4.
Page 393: Provision Port Segregation/Connectivity
45 Provision port segregation/connectivity 45.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision port segregation/connectivity and to view segregated ports for the 9500 MPR. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
Page 394 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision port segregation/connectivity WebEML User Manual Provisioning port segregation/connectivity between a Core card Ethernet port and P8ETH or EASv2 card is limited to all Ethernet ports on the P8ETH or EASv2 card. Provisioning port segregation/connectivity from a specific Core card Ethernet port to a specific P8ETH or EASv2 Ethernet port is not supported.
Page 395: Figure 222 Port Segregation Dialog Box, P8Eth Port 3.5
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision port segregation/connectivity Port segregation should be provisioned between radio ports and other Ethernet and/ or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Page 396: Figure 223 Port Segregation Provisioned On Parallel P8Eth Mpt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc Radio Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision port segregation/connectivity WebEML User Manual Figure 223 Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel P8ETH MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports Figure 224 Port Segregation dialog box, Core-E port 1.5...
Page 397: Figure 225 Port Segregation Provisioned On Parallel Core-Empt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc Radio Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision port segregation/connectivity Figure 225 Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC radio ports Figure 226 Port Segregation provisioned on Parallel MPTACC MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP- HQAM radio ports...
Page 398: Procedure
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision port segregation/connectivity WebEML User Manual 45.3 Procedure 1. Select Segregated Ports Icon. See Figure 227. Figure 227 Segregated Ports icon The Segregated Ports window opens. See Figure 228. Figure 228 Segregated Ports window 2.
Page 399: Figure 229 Segregated Port - Port Provisioning Pop-Up
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision port segregation/connectivity Figure 229 Segregated Port - Port Provisioning pop-up Figure 230 Segregated port - Slot Provisioning dialog box...
Page 400: Figure 231 Segregated Port Window W/Slot 3 Port 2 Segregated From Slot
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision port segregation/connectivity WebEML User Manual 4. Deselect all ports/slots which should be segregated from the selected port/slot. 5. Click OK. Segregated ports view updates, a dot-dash line is drawn between all ports/slots that are segregated from the provisioned port/slot.
Page 401: Figure 232 Segregated Port Window W/Slot 4 Segregated From Core-E Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision port segregation/connectivity Figure 232 Segregated Port Window W/Slot 4 segregated From Core-E port 5...
Page 402 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision port segregation/connectivity WebEML User Manual...
Page 403: Configure Aux Cross Connections (Etsi Market Only)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) 46 Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) 46.1 Purpose This chapter provides instructions and sequence for configuring AUX cross connections. 46.2 General Two types of AUX Cross-Connections can be implemented: •...
Page 404: Figure 233 Auxiliary Cross Connections Menu
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market WebEML User Manual only) • To create an AUX Cross connection • To delete an AUX Cross connection To create an AUX Cross connection 1. Select in the New Cross-Connection area the first Termination Point (this can be a local service channel or a service channel in a radio link).
Page 405: Figure 234 New Aux Cross Connection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market only) Figure 234 New AUX Cross Connection To delete an AUX Cross connection 1. Select one Cross-Connection to be deleted from the list (as shown in Figure 235).
Page 406 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure AUX cross connections (ETSI market WebEML User Manual only) 2. Click on Delete. Note: The multiple deletion of the Cross-Connection is not possible. Note: The Apply button has not been implemented.
Page 407: Provision Ethernet Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports 47 Provision Ethernet ports 47.1 Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to provision physical Ethernet ports to interface external Ethernet equipment. 47.2 General Core card provisioning requirements depend on how the Ethernet ports on the front panel of the Core-E, CorEvo, P8ETH, or EASv2 card are to be used.
Page 408: User Optical Ethernet Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual Only Asymmetric Flow Control (Tx only) is supported. PAUSE frames received on any port will be ignored and will not slow down egress traffic. 47.2.2 User optical Ethernet ports User Optical Ethernet ports on Core, P8ETH, and EASv2 cards and MSS-O support Auto Negotiation, Flow Control, 1000 Mb/s data rate, and full duplex port capability.
Page 409: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports • Each C-VLAN ID must be mapped to an S-VLAN which represents the service instance used to carry the C-VLAN in the network. The S-VLAN must have the port in its untagged set.
Page 410 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual • To enable an Ethernet port • To disable an Ethernet port • To provision Ethernet port capabilities parameters • To provision Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters •...
Page 411: Figure 236 9500 Mpr Equipment Tab: Core-E Card Selected
WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports Figure 236 9500 MPR equipment tab: Core-E card selected 2. Double-click on the blue CORE-Main (Core-E), P8ETH (EAS) or EASv2 Card or on the MSS-O. The Core-E, EAS, or MSS CORE Main View displays.
Page 412: Figure 237 Core-E Main View: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings Tab (Ports 1 To 4)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual Figure 237 Core-E main view: Ethernet Physical Interface Settings tab (ports 1 to 4) To enable an Ethernet port 1. Enable Ethernet port (electrical or optical) using the following procedure. See Figure 238.
Page 413: Figure 238 Enable/Disable Core-E/P8Eth/Easv2/Mss-O Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports Figure 238 Enable/disable Core-E/P8ETH/EASv2/MSS-O Ethernet port a. Select Ethernet Port#n to enable (Ethernet Port #1/#8). b. Select Settings tab. c. Enable Port Status, select Enabled check box (checked). d.
Page 414: Figure 239 Provision Core/Eas/Mss-O Ethernet Physical Interface
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual Figure 239 Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet physical interface 22914 a. Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8). b. Select Settings tab. c. Configure a user port label if needed. d.
Page 415: Figure 240 Provision Core/Eas/Mss-O Ethernet Port Vlan Configuration Parameters
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports g. Click on the Apply button. To provision Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters 1. Provision Ethernet port VLAN Configuration parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 240. Figure 240 Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port VLAN configuration parameters 22915...
Page 416: Figure 241 Provision Core/Eas/Mss-O Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual To provision synchronous Ethernet operation mode parameters 1. Provision Ethernet port Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 241. Note: Synchronous Ethernet Operation Mode is supported by Ethernet ports configured on the Core-E card, CorEvo card, EASv2 card, or MSS-O.
Page 417: Figure 242 Provision The Hold Off Parameter
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports f. Provision Synch-E role, select Synch-E Master or Synch-E Slave. g. Provision SSM reception and transmission, select enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked). h. Click on the Apply button. To provision Hold off timer for Core Ethernet ports in a Ring 1.
Page 418: Figure 243 Provision Provider Bridge
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual d. Click on the Apply button. To provision provider bridge parameters 1. Provision Provider Bridge parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 243. Figure 243 Provision provider bridge 23193 a.
Page 419: Figure 244 Provisioned Uni (Vlan-Based) Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports Figure 244 Provisioned UNI (VLAN-based) port e. Click on the Apply button. To provision rate limiting by port 1. Provision Ethernet Port Rate Limiter parameters using the following procedure. Figure 245.
Page 420: Figure 245 Provision Core/Eas Rate Limiting By Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual Figure 245 Provision Core/EAS rate limiting by port 22917 a. Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8). b. Select Policy & Translation tab. c. Provision Ingress Port Rate Limiter mode? a.
Page 421: Figure 246 Provision Core/Eas/Mss-O Ethernet Port Storm Control
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports j. Click on the Apply button. To provision Ethernet port storm control 1. Provision Ethernet Port Storm Control parameters using the following procedure. See Figure 246. Figure 246 Provision Core/EAS/MSS-O Ethernet port storm control 22918 a.
Page 422: Figure 247 Provision Ingress Rate Limiting By Vlan
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual To provision rate limiting by VLAN 1. Provision Rate Limiting by VLAN parameters using the following procedure. Caution: When a VLAN Rate Limiter is activated in conjunction with a Port Rate Limiter, the VLAN Rate Limiter applies to Ethernet frames that meet the Port Rate Limiter parameters.
Page 423: Figure 248 Provision Per-Vlan Per-Cos Rate Limiting
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports c. Provision VLAN Rate Limiter - Ingress mode? a. To enable, select VLAN Enabled (checked), then go to step d. b. To disable, select VLAN Enabled (unchecked), then go to step f. d.
Page 424: Figure 249 Delete Per-Vlan Per-Cos Rate Limiting
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual a. Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8). b. Select Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter tab. c. Click on the Create button. d. Select the VLAN ID from the VLAN drop-down menu.To identify the rate limiter by the PCP only, select Any.
Page 425 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet ports a. Select Ethernet Port#n to provision (Ethernet Port #1/#8). b. Select Per-VLAN Per-CoS Rate Limiter tab. c. Select a Per-VLAN Per-CoS rate limiter. d. Click on the Delete button. The rate limiter is deleted. e.
Page 426 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet ports WebEML User Manual...
Page 427: Provision Ethernet Features
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Features 48 Provision Ethernet Features 48.1 Overview To provision Ethernet Features, contact Nokia. The following Ethernet features are available: • Access Control List • Out of Range VLAN swap •...
Page 428: Vlan Swap
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Features WebEML User Manual VLAN remarking is configured via configuration file. Supported on all P8ETH, EASv2 and Core user Ethernet ports and all radio ports except MPT-HL/HLC radio ports. 48.1.4 VLAN swap VLAN swap allows the inner and outer tags to be swapped on double tagged packets.
Page 429: Provision Equipment Port
9500 MPR equipment. Provision the PDH circuit TDM2ETH when one of the termination points of the PDH circuit is terminated on non-9500 MPR equipment, and the other equipment is MEF-8 compliant. TDM clock source for E1/DS1 and DS3 ports provisioned TDM2TDM support differential clock recovery.
Page 430: Prerequisites
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual 49.3 Prerequisites Core, P32E1DS1, DS3 (P2E3DS3), STM-1/OC-3 (SDHACC), EASv2, or P8ETH cards must be enabled on the MSS shelf slots prior to provisioning equipment ports. 49.4 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •...
Page 431: Figure 250 Resource List Area: Core-E Sfp Slot Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 250 Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected 3. From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select SFP. See Figure 251.
Page 432: Figure 251 Provision Core-E Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 251 Provision Core-E SFP port 4. Click Apply. The Core SFP port will populate selected Port #. See Figure 252. Note: Core Ports 1-4 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning.
Page 433: Figure 252 Provisioned Core-E Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 252 Provisioned Core-E SFP port 5. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the Core SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable.
Page 434: Figure 253 Resource List Area: Corevo Sfp Slot Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 253 Resource list area: CorEvo SFP slot selected 3. From the Port Usage drop-down menu in port 7 or 8, select SYNC-IO. See Figure 254.
Page 435: Figure 254 Provision Corevo Sync-In/Out Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 254 Provision CorEvo Sync-In/Out SFP port 4. Click Apply. The SFP is ready to be configured as Sync-In and Sync-Out ports. See Administer synchronization. To provision Sync-In/Out SFP on MSS-1 1.
Page 436: Figure 255 Resource List Area: Mss-1 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 255 Resource list area: MSS-1 selected 3. From the Port Usage drop-down menu in port 5 or 6, select SYNC-IO. See Figure 256.
Page 437: Figure 256 Provision Mss-1 Sync-In/Out Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 256 Provision MSS-1 Sync-In/Out SFP port 4. Click Apply. The SFP is ready to be configured as Sync-In and Sync-Out ports. See Administer synchronization. To provision an EAS card SFP port 1.
Page 438: Figure 257 Resource List Area: P8Eth Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 257 Resource list area: P8ETH selected 3. From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP. See Figure 258 for P8ETH and Figure 259 for EASv2.
Page 439: Figure 258 Provision P8Eth Sfp Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 258 Provision P8ETH SFP ports Figure 259 Provision EASv2 SFP ports...
Page 440: Figure 260 Provisioned P8Eth Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual 4. Click Apply. The SFP port will populate the selected port #. See Figure 260. Note: Ports 1-4 and ports selected SFP are ready for provisioning. Figure 260 Provisioned P8ETH SFP port 5.
Page 441: Figure 261 Pdh Main View (Etsi Market)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port 4. Click Apply. The SFP port will populate port 4. 5. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the SFP Ethernet port and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desired.
Page 442 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual a. Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays. b. Select E1 port#n to provision: 01 to 32 for a P32E1DS1 card or 01 to 16 for an MSS-1. c.
Page 443: Figure 262 Resource List Area: P32E1Ds1 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 262 Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 263. 2. Provision DS1 port using the following procedure: a. Select Settings tab. The Settings tab displays.
Page 444: Figure 263 Provision P32E1Ds1 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port. j.
Page 445: Figure 264 Provisioned P32E1Ds1 Tdm2Tdm Ds1 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 264 Provisioned P32E1DS1 TDM2TDM DS1 port...
Page 446: Figure 265 Provisioned P32E1Ds1 Ds1 Tdm2Eth Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 265 Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 TDM2ETH port To provision DS3 P2E3DS3 port 1. Click on the P2E3DS3 DS3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 266.
Page 447: Figure 266 Resource List Area: P2E3Ds3 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 266 Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected The PDH Main View displays. See Figure 267. 2. Provision DS3 port using the following procedure: Figure 267 for the following steps: a.
Page 448: Figure 267 Provision P2E3Ds3 Ds3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual All ports on a DS3 card must be provisioned to the same method of clock recovery, either adaptive or differential. After the first port on a card is provisioned, all remaining ports on the card will default to the clock recovery method selected on the first port.
Page 449: Figure 268 Provisioned P2E3Ds3 Tdm2Tdm Ds3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 268 Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2TDM DS3 port...
Page 450: Figure 269 Provisioned P2E3Ds3 Tdm2Eth Ds3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 269 Provisioned P2E3DS3 TDM2ETH DS3 port Provision SDH port 1. Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource list area. 2. Select the Settings tab. See Figure 270.
Page 451: Figure 270 Resource List Area: Sdhacc Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 270 Resource list area: SDHACC selected 3. From the SFP # (1-2) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type SFP-O or SFP-E. See Figure 270. 4. Click Apply. The SDHACC SFP port will populate selected port #.
Page 452: Figure 271 Provisioned Sdhacc Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 271 Provisioned SDHACC SFP port 5. Click on the SDHACC OC-3 card in the resource detail area. The SDH Main View displays. See Figure 272.
Page 453: Figure 272 Provision Sdhacc Oc-3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 272 Provision SDHACC OC-3 port 23063 6. Provision OC-3 port using the following procedure: Figure 272 for the following steps: Note: When provisioning OC-3 ports for 1+1 EPS Protection, provision the main ports. Then only enable the spare ports.
Page 454 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual c. From the Port Status, select Enabled check box (checked). d. Click on the Apply button. e. From the User Label field, enter the User Label, up to fifteen characters. f.
Page 455: Figure 273 Provisioned Sdhacc Optical Oc-3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 273 Provisioned SDHACC optical OC-3 port...
Page 456: Figure 274 Provisioned Sdhacc Electrical Oc-3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual Figure 274 Provisioned SDHACC electrical OC-3 port 7. Provision STM-1 SDHCHANN port Click on the SDHCHANN OC-3 card in the resource detail area. The SDH Main View displays. See Figure 275.
Page 457: Figure 275 Sdhchann Main View
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision equipment port Figure 275 SDHCHANN main view 8. Provision the STM-1 port using the following procedure: a. Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1. b.
Page 458 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision equipment port WebEML User Manual g. Configure all the E1s to be mapped/unmapped in the STM-1. The E1s are identified by a progressive number from #1 to #63, but also by the standard SDH identification (x-y-z).
Page 459: Deprovision Equipment Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports 50 Deprovision equipment ports 50.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to deprovision equipment ports. Note: All procedures are shown using the MSS-8 screen, however, the operation is similar for all MSS shelves.
Page 460: Figure 276 Resource List Area: Core-E Sfp Slot Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 276 Resource list area: Core-E SFP slot selected 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 277.
Page 461: Figure 277 Provisioned Core-E Sfp Port #5
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 277 Provisioned Core-E SFP Port #5 4. Click Apply. The selected Core slot SFP port will display empty. See Figure 278. Note: Core Port will not deprovision if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port.
Page 462: Figure 278 Deprovisioned Core-E Sfp Port#5
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 278 Deprovisioned Core-E SFP Port#5 To deprovision a P8ETH or EASv2 card SFP port 1. Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
Page 463: Figure 279 Resource List Area: P8Eth Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 279 Resource list area: P8ETH selected 3. From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty. Figure 280 for P8ETH and Figure 281 for EASv2.
Page 464: Figure 280 Provisioned P8Eth Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 280 Provisioned P8ETH ports Figure 281 Provisioned EASv2 ports...
Page 465: Figure 282 Deprovisioned P8Eth Sfp Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports 4. Click Apply. The SFP port will display Empty. See Figure 282. Note: Ports 5-8 will not deprovision if the port has any cross-connections associated with the port. Figure 282 Deprovisioned P8ETH SFP port 5.
Page 466: Figure 283 Resource List Area: P32E1Ds1 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual 1. Click on the P32E1DS1 card in the resource list area. See Figure 283. Figure 283 Resource list area: P32E1DS1 selected The PDH Main View displays. 2. Select the Settings tab. See Figure 284.
Page 467: Figure 284 Provisioned P32E1Ds1 Ds1
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 284 Provisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 Figure 285 for the following steps: 3. Deprovision E1/DS1 port using the following procedure: a. Select DS1 port number to deprovision: 01 to 32. b.
Page 468: Figure 285 Deprovision P32E1Ds1 Ds1 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 285 Deprovision P32E1DS1 DS1 port Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 286. Note: P32E1DS1 Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
Page 469: Figure 286 Deprovisioned P32E1Ds1 Ds1 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 286 Deprovisioned P32E1DS1 DS1 port To deprovision a DS3 P2E3DS3 port 1. Click on the P2E3DS3 DS3 card in the resource list area. See Figure 287.
Page 470: Figure 287 Resource List Area: P2E3Ds3 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 287 Resource list area: P2E3DS3 selected The Alarms&Settings screen displays. 2. Select Settings tab. See Figure 288.
Page 471: Figure 288 Provisioned P2E3Ds3
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 288 Provisioned P2E3DS3 3. Deprovision DS3 port using the following procedure: Figure 289 for the following steps: a. Select DS3 port number to deprovision, 01 or 02. b.
Page 472: Figure 289 Deprovision P2E3Ds3 Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 289 Deprovision P2E3DS3 port Deprovisioned port will display Disabled. See Figure 290. Note: P2E3DS3 Ports will not deprovision if the port has a cross-connection associated with the port.
Page 473: Figure 290 Deprovisioned P2E3Ds3 Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 290 Deprovisioned P2E3DS3 ports To deprovision an SDH port Note: When an SDH port with performance monitoring active is disabled, the elapsed time of the performance monitoring will be stopped until the port is enabled again.
Page 474: Figure 291 Resource List Area: Sdhacc Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 291 Resource list area: SDHACC selected The SDH Main View window displays. 2. Select Settings tab. See Figure 292.
Page 475: Figure 292 Provisioned Sdhacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Deprovision equipment ports Figure 292 Provisioned SDHACC 3. Deprovision OC-3 port using the following procedure: Figure 292 for the following steps: a. Select OC-3 port number to deprovision, Port#n.1 or Port#n.2. b.
Page 476: Figure 293 Deprovisioned Sdhacc Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Deprovision equipment ports WebEML User Manual Figure 293 Deprovisioned SDHACC ports...
Page 477: Enable Equipment
51.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to enable cards into the system. See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about supported equipment. See the Release Notice for information about supported radios by interface type. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
Page 478: Figure 294 Select Slot 2 To Enable Spare Core-E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual • To enable an auxiliary card • To enable an MPT-HLS radio • To enable an MPT-HLS fan • To enable an MSS Fan Unit To enable a spare Core card 1.
Page 479: Figure 295 Select Spare Core-E Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 295 Select spare Core-E equipment type 4. Click Apply. The spare Core-E card will populate slot #2. See Figure 296. Protection informations updating window opens. 5. Click OK. 6.
Page 480: Figure 296 Spare Core-E Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 296 Spare Core-E enabled 7. Click on the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. To enable a P8ETH card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P8ETH card will be enabled.
Page 481: Figure 297 Select Slot To Enable P8Eth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 297 Select slot to enable P8ETH 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P8ETH. See Figure 298.
Page 482: Figure 298 Select P8Eth Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 298 Select P8ETH equipment type 4. Click Apply. The P8ETH card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 299.
Page 483: Figure 299 P8Eth Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 299 P8ETH enabled 5. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the P8ETH Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
Page 484: Figure 300 Select Slot To Enable Easv2
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 300 Select slot to enable EASv2 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EASv2. See Figure 301.
Page 485: Figure 301 Select Easv2 Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 301 Select EASv2 equipment type 4. Click Apply. The EASv2 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 299.
Page 486: Figure 302 Easv2 Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 302 EASv2 enabled 5. Verify port segregation provisioning. Port segregation should be provisioned between the EASv2 Ethernet ports and other Ethernet and/or radio ports where connectivity is not desirable. See Provision port segregation/connectivity detailed steps to view/provision port segregation.
Page 487: Figure 303 Select Slot Associated With Mpt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc Transceiver To
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 303 Select slot associated with MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver to enable 3. From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HL/ MPT-HLC. See Figure 304.
Page 488: Figure 304 Select Mpt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 304 Select MPT-HL/MPT-HLC equipment type 4. Click Apply. The MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port will populate selected port #. See Figure 305.
Page 489: Figure 305 Enabled Mpt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 305 Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC transceiver Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 490: Figure 306 Resource List Area: Core-E Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 306 Resource list area: Core-E selected 3. From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HL/ MPT-HLC. See Figure 307.
Page 491: Figure 307 Provision Core-E Mpt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 307 Provision Core-E MPT-HL/MPT-HLC ports 4. Click Apply. The Core MPT-HL/MPT-HLC port will populate the selected port #. See Figure 308.
Page 492: Figure 308 Enabled Mpt-Hl/Mpt-Hlc On Core-E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 308 Enabled MPT-HL/MPT-HLC on Core-E Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 493: Figure 309 Select Slot To Enable P32E1Ds1
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 309 Select slot to enable P32E1DS1 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P32E1DS1 or P32E1DS1_A. See Figure 310.
Page 494: Figure 310 Select P32Eds1 Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 310 Select P32EDS1 equipment type 4. Click Apply. The P32E1DS1 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 311.
Page 495: Figure 311 P32E1Ds1 Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 311 P32E1DS1 enabled To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card 1. To enable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P2E3DS3 card will be enabled.
Page 496: Figure 312 Select Slot To Enable P2E3Ds3
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 312 Select slot to enable P2E3DS3 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select P2E3DS3_A. See Figure 313.
Page 497: Figure 313 Select P2E3Ds3 Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 313 Select P2E3DS3 equipment type 4. Click Apply. The P2E3DS3 card will populate selected slot #. See Figure P2E3DS3 enabled.
Page 498: Figure 314 P2E3Ds3 Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 314 P2E3DS3 enabled To enable an SDH card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the SDHACC or SDHCHANN card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue.
Page 499: Figure 315 Select Slot To Enable Sdhacc Or Sdhchann
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 315 Select slot to enable SDHACC or SDHCHANN 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select SDHACC (shown in the examples) or SDHCHANN (ETSI market only).
Page 500: Figure 316 Select Sdhacc Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 316 Select SDHACC equipment type 4. Click Apply. The card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 317.
Page 501: Figure 317 Sdhacc Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 317 SDHACC enabled To enable an MPT access card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the MPT Access card will be enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 502: Figure 318 Select Slot To Enable Mptacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 318 Select slot to enable MPTACC 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select MPTACC. See Figure 319.
Page 503: Figure 319 Select Mptacc Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 319 Select MPTACC equipment type 4. Click Apply. The MPT Access card will populate selected slot #. See Figure 320.
Page 504: Figure 320 Mptacc Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 320 MPTACC enabled To enable MPT ODU on MPTACC card 1. Select slot the MSS/MPTACC (MPT Access) card is equipped to support MPT ODU in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the MPTACC card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 505: Figure 321 Resource List Area: Mptacc Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 321 Resource list area: MPTACC selected Note: MPTACC Ports 1 and 2 support optical SFP interfaces. Ports 3 and 4 support electrical GigE Ethernet Interfaces. Up to two ports are supported. Either one or two optical, one or two electrical, or one electrical and one optical ports are supported simultaneously.
Page 506: Figure 322 Provision Mptacc Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 322 Provision MPTACC port 4. Click Apply. The MPTACC MPT-HC or MPT-HQAM port will populate selected port #. See Figure 323.
Page 507: Figure 323 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu On Mptacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 323 Enabled MPT-HC ODU on MPTACC Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 508: Figure 324 Resource List Area: Core-E Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 321. Figure 324 Resource list area: Core-E selected 3. Provision MPT ODUconnected to electrical or optical SFP Ethernet port? a.
Page 509: Figure 325 Provision Core-E Mpt-Hc/Xp Optical Sfp Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 325 Provision Core-E MPT-HC/XP optical SFP Ethernet port 5. Click Apply. The Core MPT card will populate selected port #. See Figure 326.
Page 510: Figure 326 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu On Core-E Optical Sfp Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 326 Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port 6. Go to step 9. 7. From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC, MPT-MC or MPT-HQAM.
Page 511: Figure 327 Provision Core-E Mpt-Hc Electrical Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 327 Provision Core-E MPT-HC electrical Ethernet port 8. Click Apply. The Core MPT card will populate the selected port #. See Figure 328.
Page 512: Figure 328 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu On Core-E Electrical Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 328 Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E electrical Ethernet port Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 513: Figure 329 Resource List Area: P8Eth Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. See Figure 329. 3. From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type MPT-HC, MPT- MC, or MPT-HQAM. Figure 329 Resource list area: P8ETH selected 4.
Page 514: Figure 330 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu On P8Eth Optical Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 330 Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH optical Ethernet port Caution: When parallel radio paths exist between two MSS shelves, port segregation should be provisioned between the parallel radio paths at both ends to prevent a loss of traffic.
Page 515: Figure 331 Select Slot#8 To Enable Auxiliary Card
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 331 Select Slot#8 to enable auxiliary card 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select AUX. See Figure 332.
Page 516: Figure 332 Select Aux Equipment Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 332 Select AUX equipment type 4. Click Apply. The Auxiliary card will populate slot #8. See Figure 333.
Page 517: Figure 333 Auxiliary Card Enabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 333 Auxiliary card enabled To enable an MPT-HLS radio 1. See Figure 334 Figure 335 and follow the steps to enable the MPT-HLS radio card.
Page 518: Figure 334 Enable The Subrack For An Mpt-Hls Radio
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 334 Enable the subrack for an MPT-HLS radio 23757 To enable the radio card: 1. Click on the top level element in the Equipment view. 2. In the Settings panel, choose SR-MPT-HLS from the Top Rack or Bottom Rack drop-down.
Page 519: Figure 335 Enable The Mpt-Hls Radio
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment Figure 335 Enable the MPT-HLS radio 23758 4. Click on one of the vertical slots of the subrack. 5. In the Settings panel, choose MPT-HLS from the Equipment Type drop- down.
Page 520: Figure 336 Enable The Mpt-Hls Fan
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 336 Enable the MPT-HLS fan 23759 1. Click on the horizontal slot above the radio slots. 2. In the settings panel, choose SR-FAN4 from the Equipment Type drop- down.
Page 521: Figure 337 Enabling Fan Unit
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Enable equipment To enable an MSS Fan Unit 1. See Figure 337. Follow the steps to enable the Fan, A-FAN, or E-FAN Unit. Figure 337 Enabling Fan Unit 25301 To enable the fan: i.
Page 522 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Enable equipment WebEML User Manual...
Page 523: Disable Equipment
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment 52 Disable equipment 52.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to Disable cards in the system. Note: The Core graphics in this chapter show the Core-E card. The procedure is similar for a CorEvo card.
Page 524: Figure 338 Enabled Spare Core-E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual To disable the spare Core card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot#2 in the resource tree area. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights spare Core card in slot #2 in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 525: Figure 339 Disable Spare Core-E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 339 Disable spare Core-E 4. Click Apply. The spare Core card is removed from slot #2. See Figure 340. Note: Spare Core Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 526: Figure 340 Spare Core-E Disabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 340 Spare Core-E disabled To disable a radio 1. Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on P8ETH or EASv2 Select the slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
Page 527: Figure 341 Enabled Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 341 Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver 3. From the Port # (5-8) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 342.
Page 528: Figure 342 Disable Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 342 Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver 4. Click Apply. The port # will display Empty and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 343.
Page 529: Figure 343 Disabled Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 343 Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver To disable an MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver card on Core 1. Select the slot where the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC is equipped in the resource tree area.
Page 530: Figure 344 Enabled Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 344 Enabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver 3. From the Port # (5-6) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 345.
Page 531: Figure 345 Disable Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 345 Disable MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver 4. Click Apply. The Core port # will display Empty and the MPT-HL/MPT-HLC will be removed from the resource list area. See Figure 346.
Page 532: Figure 346 Disabled Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 346 Disabled MPT-HL or MPT-HLC transceiver To disable a P8ETH card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P8ETH card is enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 533: Figure 347 Enabled P8Eth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 347 Enabled P8ETH 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 348.
Page 534: Figure 348 Disable P8Eth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 348 Disable P8ETH 4. Click Apply. The P8ETH card is removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 349. Note: P8ETH Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects, MPT-HL/MPT-HLC Transceiver cards, and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 535: Figure 349 P8Eth Disabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 349 P8ETH disabled To disable an EASv2 card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the EASv2 card is enabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 536: Figure 350 Enabled Easv2
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 350 Enabled EASv2 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 351.
Page 537: Figure 351 Disable Easv2
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 351 Disable EASv2 4. Click Apply. The EASv2 card is removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 352. Note: The EASv2 card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects, MPT-HL/MPT- HLC Transceiver cards, and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 538: Figure 352 Easv2 Disabled
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 352 EASv2 disabled To disable a P32E1DS1 card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P32E1DS1 card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 539: Figure 353 Enabled P32E1Ds1
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 353 Enabled P32E1DS1 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 354. 4. Click Apply.
Page 540: Figure 354 Disable P32E1Ds1
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 354 Disable P32E1DS1 The P32E1DS1 card is removed from selected slot #. See Figure 355. Note: P32E1DS1 Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 541: Figure 355 Disabled P32E1Ds1
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 355 Disabled P32E1DS1 To disable a DS3 P2E3DS3 card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the P2E3DS3 card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 542: Figure 356 Enabled P2E3Ds3
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 356 Enabled P2E3DS3 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 357.
Page 543: Figure 357 Disable P2E3Ds3
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 357 Disable P2E3DS3 4. Click Apply. The P2E3DS3 card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 358. Note: P2E3DS3 Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 544: Figure 358 Disabled P2E3Ds3
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 358 Disabled P2E3DS3 Disable an SDH card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the SDH card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 545: Figure 359 Enabled Sdhacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 359 Enabled SDHACC 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 360.
Page 546: Figure 360 Disable Sdhacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 360 Disable SDHACC 4. Click Apply. The card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 361. Note: The SDH Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 547: Figure 361 Disabled Sdhacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 361 Disabled SDHACC To disable an MPT ODU on MPTACC 1. To disable an MPT ODU on MPTACC Select slot the MSS/MPTACC (MPT Access) card is equipped in the resource tree area.
Page 548: Figure 362 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 362 Enabled MPT-HC ODU 3. From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 363.
Page 549: Figure 363 Disable Mpt-Hc Odu
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 363 Disable MPT-HC ODU 4. Click Apply. The MPTACC port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 364.
Page 550: Figure 364 Disabled Mpt-Hc Odu
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 364 Disabled MPT-HC ODU To disable an MPT ODU on Core 1. Select slot the MSS/CORE card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the Core card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 551: Figure 365 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu On Core-E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 365 Enabled MPT-HC ODU on Core-E 3. Deprovision MPT-HC/XP/HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM/9558HC connected to electrical or optical SFP Ethernet port? a. If electrical Ethernet port, go to step 6. b. If optical SFP Ethernet port, go to step 4. 4.
Page 552: Figure 366 Disable Mpt-Hc Odu From Core-E Optical Sfp Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 366 Disable MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port 5. Click Apply. The MPTACC port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area.
Page 553: Figure 367 Disabled Mpt-Hc Odu From Core-E Optical Sfp Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 367 Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E optical SFP Ethernet port 6. From the Port # (1-4) Usage drop-down menu, select port usage type Empty. Figure 368.
Page 554: Figure 368 Deprovision Mpt-Hc From Core-E Electrical Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 368 Deprovision MPT-HC from Core-E electrical Ethernet port 7. Click Apply. The Core MPT ODU port will display empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 369.
Page 555: Figure 369 Disabled Mpt-Hc Odu From Core-E Electrical Ethernet Port
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 369 Disabled MPT-HC ODU from Core-E electrical Ethernet port To disable an MPT-HC/XP/HC-HQAM/XP-HQAM/9558HC on P8ETH or EASv2 1. Select slot where the card is equipped in the resource tree area. The selected name will highlight in blue.
Page 556: Figure 370 Enabled Mpt-Hc Odu On P8Eth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 370 Enabled MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH 3. From the Port Usage drop-down menu, select usage type Empty. See Figure 371.
Page 557: Figure 371 Disable Mpt-Hc Odu On P8Eth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 371 Disable MPT-HC ODU on P8ETH 4. Click Apply. The port # will display Empty and the MPT ODU is removed from the resource list area. See Figure 372.
Page 558: Figure 372 Disabled Mpt Odu From P8Eth
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 372 Disabled MPT ODU from P8ETH To disable an MPT access card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot# (slot 3 through 8) in the resource tree area where the MPT Access card will be disabled.
Page 559: Figure 373 Enabled Mptacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 373 Enabled MPTACC 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 374.
Page 560: Figure 374 Disable Mptacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 374 Disable MPTACC 4. Click Apply. The MPT Access card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 375. Note: MPT Access Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 561: Figure 375 Disabled Mptacc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 375 Disabled MPTACC To disable an auxiliary card 1. Select MSS-n/Slot#8 in the resource tree area where the Auxiliary card will be disabled. The selected slot will highlight in blue. This selection also highlights the selected slot in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 562: Figure 376 Enabled Auxiliary Card
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 376 Enabled auxiliary card 2. Click the Settings Tab in the resource detail area. 3. From the Equipment Type drop-down menu, select EMPTY. See Figure 377.
Page 563: Figure 377 Disable Auxiliary Card
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Disable equipment Figure 377 Disable auxiliary card 4. Click Apply. The Auxiliary card disabled will be removed from the selected slot #. See Figure 378. Note: Auxiliary Card will not be disabled if the card has cross-connects and/or equipment ports associated.
Page 564: Figure 378 Disabled Auxiliary Card
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Disable equipment WebEML User Manual Figure 378 Disabled auxiliary card...
Page 565: Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (Erp)
53 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 53.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP). See the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual for information about supported configurations. 53.2 Prerequisites MPT-HC/HC-HQAM/XP/XP-HQAM radio ports must be provisioned prior to ERP provisioning.
Page 566: General
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual 53.3 General Use the procedures in this chapter to configure ERP on every node in the ring. The procedures are arranged in the sequence to correctly provision ERP Caution: For radios to be associated with a new ERP topology which have existing cross- connections and/or VLAN traffic provisioned, ERP topology provisioning is traffic affecting.
Page 567: Figure 379 Ethernet Ring Configuration View Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 1. Select Ethernet Ring Configuration View icon from the main toolbar. See Figure 379. Figure 379 Ethernet Ring Configuration view icon Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window displays. See Figure 380.
Page 568 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual Caution: For radios to be associated with a new ERP topology which have existing cross- connections and/or VLAN traffic provisioned, ERP topology provisioning is traffic affecting. i.
Page 569: Figure 381 Erp Topology Creation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) Figure 381 ERP Topology creation Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. Ring Topology is added to the Ring Topologies table. See Figure ERP Topology created. Figure 382 ERP Topology created 4.
Page 570 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual 5. Provision ERP Instance using the following procedure: Figure 383 for the following steps: a. Enter ERP Label in the New ERP Label field. b. Enter R-APS VLAN ID in the R-APS VLAN ID field. Note: R-APS VLAN ID must be provisioned to the same value on all Ethernet Ring Nodes belonging to the ERP Instance.
Page 571: Figure 383 Erp Instance Creation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) Figure 383 ERP Instance creation Ethernet Protection Ring Configuration window updates. ERP Instance is added to ERP Instances table. See Figure 384. Figure 384 ERP Instance created 6.
Page 572: Figure 385 Two Erp Instances Created
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual a. If yes, repeat steps to create a second ERP Instance. Figure 384 for an example of two ERP Instances provisioned. b. If no, go to step 7. Figure 385 Two ERP Instances created 7.
Page 573 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) Note: To provision an Ethernet Ring, it is recommended to Create Ring Topology and ERP Instances on all ring nodes prior to enabling the ERP Instance. To provision additional Ethernet ring nodes repeat steps through on each ring node.
Page 574: Figure 386 Add Pdh Vlan Ids To Erp Instance
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual Figure 386 Add PDH VLAN IDs to ERP Instance 3. Add PDH VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add PDH to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
Page 575 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) 2. Add MEF8 Ethernet VLAN IDs to Ethernet Ring cross-connections. For detailed steps to add ETH to Ring cross-connections, see Provision cross connections.
Page 576 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual 3. Add pass-through flow to ERP instance Note: Ring to Ring cross-connections are required at all pass-through ring nodes. Traffic flows (PDH to Ring, Radio to Ring, and ETH to Ring) which enter and exit the Ring, at nodes other than the node being provisioned, require Ring to Ring cross connection provisioned.
Page 577: Figure 387 Oam Switching Criteria
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) Provision the Hold Off timer for any Ethernet ports in the ERP Instance. For detailed steps, see Provision Ethernet ports. To provision ETH OAM switching criteria (optional) 1.
Page 578 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) WebEML User Manual...
Page 579: Upgrade A Ring To R5.1.0 Software
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software 54 Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software 54.1 Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to activate R5.1.0 software on Ring nodes when ERPS is in use. This procedure must be performed when upgrading from a release earlier than R5.0.0 to ensure that the Ring status is maintained during the software upgrade.
Page 580: Procedure
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software WebEML User Manual 54.3 Procedure 1. Download the R5.1.0 software to all Ring Nodes. 2. Verify that no fault condition exists on the Ring. 3. Activate a Tx mute on Ring Node B toward Node C, see Figure 389.
Page 581: Figure 390 Activate Software On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software Figure 390 Activate software on Node B 5. Remove the Tx mute toward Node C, see Figure 391. After the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in idle state.
Page 582: Figure 391 Remove Tx Mute To Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software WebEML User Manual Figure 391 Remove Tx mute to Node C 6. Activate a Tx mute on Node C toward Node D and activate the R5.1.0 software on Node C, see Figure 392.
Page 583: Figure 392 Activate Tx Mute And Activate Sw On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software Figure 392 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node C 7. Remove the Tx mute toward Node D, see Figure 393. After the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in idle state.
Page 584: Figure 393 Remove Tx Mute To Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software WebEML User Manual Figure 393 Remove Tx mute to Node D 8. Activate a Tx mute on Node D toward Node A and activate the R5.1.0 software on Node D, see Figure 394.
Page 585: Figure 394 Activate Tx Mute And Activate Sw On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software Figure 394 Activate Tx mute and activate SW on Node D 9. Remove the Tx mute toward Node A, see Figure 395. If the NE MAC Address of Node A (used as Node ID by ERPS) is higher than NE MAC Address of Node D, after the WTR time has expired, the RPL owner puts the Ring in Idle state, otherwise all Ring Nodes other than RPL Owner go in Pending state.
Page 586: Figure 395 Remove Tx Mute To Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software WebEML User Manual Figure 395 Remove Tx mute to Node A 10. Activate the R5.1.0 software on Node A, the RPL owner, see Figure 396. TDM and Ethernet traffic entering Node A is protected by the Ring when the radio interfaces toward Nodes B and D go down.
Page 587: Figure 396 Remove Tx Mute To Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software Figure 396 Remove Tx mute to Node A...
Page 588 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Upgrade a Ring to R5.1.0 software WebEML User Manual...
Page 589: Provision Cross Connections In A Mixed Fiber/Microwave Ring
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring 55 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring 55.1 Purpose This chapter provides the procedure to provision cross connections in an Ethernet Ring that contains both fiber and microwave ports.
Page 590: Procedures
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 397 Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring The sample Ring consists of nodes A, B, C, D, I, J and K. Nodes A, B, C and D are members of the Ring’s fiber chain.
Page 591: Figure 398 Cross-Connection Between Node J And Node K
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring • To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D • To provision a cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected) •...
Page 592: Figure 399 Node J To Node K: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 399 Node J to Node K: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 593: Figure 400 Node J To Node K: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 400 Node J to Node K: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 594: Figure 401 Node J To Node K: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 401 Node J to Node K: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 595: Figure 402 Node J To Node K: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 402 Node J to Node K: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 596: Figure 403 Cross-Connection Between Node J And Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 403 Cross-connection between Node J and Node D Configure a pass-through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 404. Figure 404 Node J to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node A...
Page 597: Figure 405 Node J To Node D: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b. Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH c. Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH d.
Page 598: Figure 406 Node J To Node D: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 406 Node J to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 599: Figure 407 Node J To Node D: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 407 Node J to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D...
Page 600: Figure 408 Node J To Node D: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 408 Node J to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 601: Figure 409 Cross-Connection Between Node J And Node D (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 409 Cross-connection between Node J and Node D (protected) Configure a pass-through cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 410. Figure 410 Node J to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node A...
Page 602: Figure 411 Node J To Node D (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b. Choose the Service profile: TDM2TDM or TDM2ETH c. Choose the Clock Source, if the Service profile is TDM2ETH d.
Page 603: Figure 412 Node J To Node D (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 412 Node J to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 604: Figure 413 Node J To Node D (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 413 Node J to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D...
Page 605: Figure 414 Node J To Node D (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 414 Node J to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 606: Figure 415 Cross-Connection Between Node K And Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 415 Cross-connection between Node K and Node B Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 416 Figure 417.
Page 607: Figure 417 Node K To Node B: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 417 Node K to Node B: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 608: Figure 418 Node K To Node B: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 418 Node K to Node B: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 609: Figure 419 Node K To Node B: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 419 Node K to Node B: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 610: Figure 420 Node K To Node B: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 420 Node K to Node B: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 611: Figure 421 Cross-Connection Between Node K And Node B (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 421 Cross-connection between Node K and Node B (protected) Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 406 Figure 407.
Page 612: Figure 422 Node K To Node B (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 422 Node K to Node B (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B...
Page 613: Figure 423 Node K To Node B (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 423 Node K to Node B (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 614: Figure 424 Node K To Node B (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 424 Node K to Node B (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 615: Figure 425 Node K To Node B (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 425 Node K to Node B (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 616: Figure 426 Node K To Node B (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 426 Node K to Node B (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 617: Figure 427 Cross-Connection Between Node I And Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 427 Cross-connection between Node I and NE G Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 428 Figure 429.
Page 618: Figure 428 Node I To Ne G: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 428 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 619: Figure 429 Node I To Ne G: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 429 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 620: Figure 430 Node I To Ne G: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 430 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 621: Figure 431 Node I To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 431 Node I to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 622: Figure 432 Node I To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 432 Node I to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 623: Figure 433 Node I To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 433 Node I to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 624: Figure 434 Cross-Connection Between Node I And Ne G (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 434 Cross-connection between Node I and NE G (protected) Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G, see Figure 435 Figure 436.
Page 625: Figure 435 Node I To Ne G (Protected): Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 435 Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 626: Figure 436 Node I To Ne G: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 436 Node I to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 627: Figure 437 Node I To Ne G (Protected): Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 437 Node I to NE G (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 628: Figure 438 Node I To Ne G (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 438 Node I to NE G (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 629: Figure 439 Node I To Ne G (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 439 Node I to NE G (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 630: Figure 440 Node I To Ne G (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 440 Node I to NE G (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 631: Figure 441 Cross-Connection Between Node I And Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 441 Cross-connection between Node I and NE E Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 442 Figure 443.
Page 632: Figure 442 Node I To Ne E: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 442 Node I to NE E: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 633: Figure 443 Node I To Ne E: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 443 Node I to NE E: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 634: Figure 444 Node I To Ne E: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 444 Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 635: Figure 445 Node I To Ne E: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 445 Node I to NE E: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 636: Figure 446 Node I To Ne E: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 446 Node I to NE E: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 637: Figure 447 Node I To Ne E: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 447 Node I to NE E: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 638: Figure 448 Cross-Connection Between Node I And Ne E (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 448 Cross-connection between Node I and NE E (protected) Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 449 Figure 450.
Page 639: Figure 449 Node I To Ne E (Protected): Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 449 Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 640: Figure 450 Node I To Ne E (Protected): Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 450 Node I to NE E (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 641: Figure 451 Node I To Ne E: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 451 Node I to NE E: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 642: Figure 452 Node I To Ne E (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 452 Node I to NE E (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 643: Figure 453 Node I To Ne E (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 453 Node I to NE E (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 644: Figure 454 Node I To Ne E (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 454 Node I to NE E (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 645: Figure 455 Cross-Connection Between Node A And Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 455 Cross-connection between Node A and Node D Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 456 Figure 457.
Page 646: Figure 457 Node A To Node D: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 457 Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 647: Figure 458 Node A To Node D: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 458 Node A to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 648: Figure 459 Node A To Node D: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 459 Node A to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 649: Figure 460 Node A To Node D: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 460 Node A to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D...
Page 650: Figure 461 Node A To Node D: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 461 Node A to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 651: Figure 462 Cross-Connection Between Node A And Node D (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 462 Cross-connection between Node A and Node D (protected) Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 463 Figure 464.
Page 652: Figure 464 Node A To Node D (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 464 Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 653: Figure 465 Node A To Node D (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 465 Node A to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 654: Figure 466 Node A To Node D (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 466 Node A to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 655: Figure 467 Node A To Node D (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 467 Node A to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D...
Page 656: Figure 468 Node A To Node D (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 468 Node A to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 657: Figure 469 Cross-Connection Between Node A (Protected) And Node D (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 469 Cross-connection between Node A (protected) and Node D (protected) Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 470 Figure 471.
Page 658: Figure 471 Node A (Protected) To Node D (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 471 Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 659: Figure 472 Node A (Protected) To Node D (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 472 Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 660: Figure 473 Node A (Protected) To Node D (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 473 Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 661: Figure 474 Node A (Protected) To Node D (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 474 Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D...
Page 662: Figure 475 Node A (Protected) To Node D (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 475 Node A (protected) to Node D (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 663: Figure 476 Cross-Connection Between Node A And Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 476 Cross-connection between Node A and Node C Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 477 Figure 478.
Page 664: Figure 478 Node A To Node C: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 478 Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 665: Figure 479 Node A To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 479 Node A to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 666: Figure 480 Node A To Node C: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 480 Node A to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 667: Figure 481 Node A To Node C: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 481 Node A to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 668: Figure 482 Node A To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 482 Node A to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 669: Figure 483 Cross-Connection Between Node A And Node C (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 483 Cross-connection between Node A and Node C (protected) Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A, see Figure 484 Figure 485.
Page 670: Figure 485 Node A To Node C (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 485 Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 671: Figure 486 Node A To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 486 Node A to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 672: Figure 487 Node A To Node C (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 487 Node A to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 673: Figure 488 Node A To Node C (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 488 Node A to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 674: Figure 489 Node A To Node C (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 489 Node A to Node C (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 675: Figure 490 Cross-Connection Between Node B And Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 490 Cross-connection between Node B and Node C Configure a Radio-Ring or PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B, see Figure 491 Figure 492.
Page 676: Figure 491 Node B To Node C: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 491 Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node B...
Page 677: Figure 492 Node B To Node C: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 492 Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 678: Figure 493 Node B To Node C: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 493 Node B to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 679: Figure 494 Node B To Node C: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 494 Node B to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 680: Figure 495 Node B To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 495 Node B to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 681: Figure 496 Node B To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 496 Node B to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 682: Figure 497 Cross-Connection Between Ne E And Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 497 Cross-connection between NE E and Node D Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 498 Figure 499.
Page 683: Figure 498 Ne E To Node D: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 498 NE E to Node D: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 684: Figure 499 Ne E To Node D: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 499 NE E to Node D: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 685: Figure 500 Ne E To Node D: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 500 NE E to Node D: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 686: Figure 501 Ne E To Node D: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 501 NE E to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 687: Figure 502 Ne E To Node D: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 502 NE E to Node D: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 688: Figure 503 Ne E To Node D: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 503 NE E to Node D: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node D...
Page 689: Figure 504 Ne E To Node D: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 504 NE E to Node D: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 690: Figure 505 Cross-Connection Between Ne E And Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 505 Cross-connection between NE E and Node C Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 506 Figure 507.
Page 691: Figure 506 Ne E To Node C: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 506 NE E to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 692: Figure 507 Ne E To Node C: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 507 NE E to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 693: Figure 508 Ne E To Node C: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 508 NE E to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 694: Figure 509 Ne E To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 509 NE E to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 695: Figure 510 Ne E To Node C: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 510 NE E to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 696: Figure 511 Ne E To Node C: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 511 NE E to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 697: Figure 512 Ne E To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 512 NE E to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 698: Figure 513 Cross-Connection Between Ne F And Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 513 Cross-connection between NE F and Node C Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 514 Figure 515.
Page 699: Figure 514 Ne F To Node C: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne F
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 514 NE F to Node C: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 700: Figure 515 Ne F To Node C: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne F
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 515 NE F to Node C: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 701: Figure 516 Ne F To Node C: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 516 NE F to Node C: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 702: Figure 517 Ne F To Node C: Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 517 NE F to Node C: Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 703: Figure 518 Ne F To Node C: Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 518 NE F to Node C: PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 704: Figure 519 Ne F To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 519 NE F to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 705: Figure 520 Ne F To Node C: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 520 NE F to Node C: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 706: Figure 521 Cross-Connection Between Ne F And Node C (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 521 Cross-connection between NE F and Node C (protected) Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 522 Figure 523.
Page 707: Figure 522 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 522 NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 708: Figure 523 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne F
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 523 NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 709: Figure 524 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 524 NE F to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 710: Figure 525 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 525 NE F to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 711: Figure 526 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 526 NE F to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 712: Figure 527 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 527 NE F to Node C (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 713: Figure 528 Ne F To Node C (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 528 NE F to Node C (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 714: Figure 529 Cross-Connection Between Ne F (Protected) And Node C (Protected)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 529 Cross-connection between NE F (protected) and Node C (protected) Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 530 Figure 531.
Page 715: Figure 530 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne F
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 530 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 716: Figure 531 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Ethernet-Pdh Cross
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 531 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 717: Figure 532 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 532 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 718: Figure 533 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Radio-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 533 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): Radio-Ring cross-connection on Node C...
Page 719: Figure 534 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Pdh-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 534 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): PDH-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 720: Figure 535 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Pass-Through Cross
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 535 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 721: Figure 536 Ne F (Protected) To Node C (Protected): Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 536 NE F (protected) to Node C (protected): pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 722: Figure 537 Cross-Connection Between Ne E And Ne H
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 537 Cross-connection between NE E and NE H Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 538 Figure 539.
Page 723: Figure 538 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 538 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 724: Figure 539 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 539 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 725: Figure 540 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 540 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 726: Figure 541 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 541 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 727: Figure 542 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne H
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 542 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE H a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 728: Figure 543 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne H
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 543 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE H e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 729: Figure 544 Ne E To Ne H: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 544 NE E to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 730: Figure 545 Ne E To Ne H: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 545 NE E to NE H: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 731: Figure 546 Ne E To Ne H: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 546 NE E to NE H: pass-through cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 732: Figure 547 Ne To Ne H: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 547 NE to NE H: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 733: Figure 548 Cross-Connection Between Ne E And Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 548 Cross-connection between NE E and NE G Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E, see Figure 549 Figure 550.
Page 734: Figure 549 Ne E To Ne G: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 549 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE E a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 735: Figure 550 Ne E To Ne G: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne E
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 550 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE E e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 736: Figure 551 Ne E To Ne G: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 551 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 737: Figure 552 Ne E To Ne G: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 552 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 738: Figure 553 Ne E To Ne G: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 553 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 739: Figure 554 Ne E To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 554 NE E to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 740: Figure 555 Ne E To Ne G: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 555 NE E to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 741: Figure 556 Ne E To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 556 NE E to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 742: Figure 557 Cross-Connection Between Ne F And Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 557 Cross-connection between NE F and NE G Configure an Ethernet-Radio or Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F, see Figure 558 Figure 559.
Page 743: Figure 558 Ne F To Ne G: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne F
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 558 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE F a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 744: Figure 559 Ne F To Ne G: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne F
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 559 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE F e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 745: Figure 560 Ne F To Ne G: Ethernet-Radio Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 560 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-radio cross-connection on NE G a. Enter the flow ID in the Flow ID field b.
Page 746: Figure 561 Ne F To Ne G: Ethernet-Pdh Cross-Connection On Ne G
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 561 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-PDH cross-connection on NE G e. Choose the flow ID from the Flow Id drop-down f.
Page 747: Figure 562 Ne F To Ne G: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node B
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 562 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node B a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 748: Figure 563 Ne F To Ne G: Ethernet-Ring Cross-Connection On Node C
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 563 NE F to NE G: Ethernet-Ring cross-connection on Node C a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 749: Figure 564 Ne F To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node A
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ microwave Ring Figure 564 NE F to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node A a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 750: Figure 565 Ne F To Ne G: Pass-Through Cross-Connection On Node D
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/ WebEML User Manual microwave Ring Figure 565 NE F to NE G: pass-through cross-connection on Node D a. Choose the flow IDs to cross-connect from the Available VLANs list b.
Page 751: Provision Ring Cross-Connections Using The Aided Cross-Connection Tool
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool 56 Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool 56.1 Purpose The aided cross-connection tool is a smart tool to help the user to select the correct MAC address for cross-connections on nodes that are members of the fiber chain of a mixed fiber-microwave Ring.
Page 752: Figure 566 Sample Mixed Fiber/Microwave Ring
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ring cross-connections using the WebEML User Manual aided cross-connection tool Figure 566 Sample mixed fiber/microwave Ring The sample Ring consists of nodes A, B, C, D, I, J and K. Nodes A, B, C and D are members of the Ring’s fiber chain.
Page 753 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool 56.2.2 Aided Cross-connection in Cross-connections panel At the cross-connection creation, each MAC address parameter requested is automatically selected by the tool, or a short list of MAC address options is provided. Additional information, according to the type of cross-connection, is requested by the GUI to determine the MAC addresses.
Page 754: Figure 567 Ring's Fiber Chain Description
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ring cross-connections using the WebEML User Manual aided cross-connection tool Figure 567 Ring’s Fiber Chain Description The Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window opens, see Figure 568.
Page 755: Figure 568 Ring's Fiber Chain For Aided Cross-Connections Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool Figure 568 Ring’s Fiber Chain for Aided Cross-connections window 2. In the Ring Nodes of Fiber Chain panel, click on the button to add Ring nodes. Enter the label, topology type and NE MAC address for each node in the fiber chain.
Page 756: Figure 569 Add&Drop Cross-Connection: Other End Point Is Outside The Fiber Chain
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ring cross-connections using the WebEML User Manual aided cross-connection tool Provision the cross-connections for the nodes in the fiber chain, as outlined in Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring. The Aided radio button is selected in the MAC Address Selection panel.
Page 757: Figure 570 Add&Drop Cross-Connection: Other End Point Is Inside The Fiber Chain
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool Figure 570 Add&Drop cross-connection: Other end point is inside the fiber chain...
Page 758: Figure 571 Pass-Through Cross-Connection: Both End Points Are Inside The Fiber Chain (1)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ring cross-connections using the WebEML User Manual aided cross-connection tool Figure 571 Pass-through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (1)
Page 759: Figure 572 Pass-Through Cross-Connection: Both End Points Are Inside The Fiber Chain (2)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool Figure 572 Pass-through cross-connection: Both end points are inside the fiber chain (2)
Page 760: Figure 573 Pass-Through Cross-Connection: One End Point Is Inside The Fiber Chain (1)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ring cross-connections using the WebEML User Manual aided cross-connection tool Figure 573 Pass-through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (1)
Page 761: Figure 574 Pass-Through Cross-Connection: One End Point Is Inside The Fiber Chain (2)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Ring cross-connections using the aided cross-connection tool Figure 574 Pass-through cross-connection: One end point is inside the fiber chain (2)
Page 762: Figure 575 Pass-Through Cross-Connection: Both End Points Are Outside The Fiber Chain
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Ring cross-connections using the WebEML User Manual aided cross-connection tool Figure 575 Pass-through cross-connection: Both end points are outside the fiber chain 7. See Provision cross connections in a mixed fiber/microwave Ring to provision the remaining cross-connections in the Ring.
Page 763 To view protection schemes 1. Select Protection Schemes Tab. The Protection Schemes tab opens. See Figure 576. All the protection schemes provisioned for the 9500 MPR radio are displayed in the main window pane. 2. Expand Protection Schemes in the resource tree area.
Page 764: Figure 576 Protection Schemes Resource Tree Expanded
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision protection scheme parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 576 Protection Schemes resource tree expanded 3. Protection scheme Select action. a. To View Core Protection Scheme parameters, go to step 4. b. To View Synchronization Protection Scheme parameters, go to step 6.
Page 765: Figure 577 Core-E Protection Scheme Parameter Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision protection scheme parameters Figure 577 Core-E Protection Scheme Parameter tab 5. From the Restoration Criteria partition, verify restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a. Select restoration criteria radio button, Not Revertive or Revertive. b.
Page 766: Figure 578 Synchronization Protection Scheme Parameter Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision protection scheme parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 578 Synchronization Protection Scheme Parameter tab The Synchronization switching scheme is provisioned on the Synchronization tab. For detailed procedure to provision Synchronization switching parameters Administer synchronization.
Page 767: Figure 579 Radio Channel Protection Scheme Parameter Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision protection scheme parameters Figure 579 Radio Channel Protection Scheme Parameter tab 8. To view EPS protection scheme parameter, select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 9. To view HSB protection scheme parameter, select HSB Protection in the resource tree area.
Page 768: Figure 580 Equipment Protection Scheme Parameter Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision protection scheme parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 580 Equipment Protection Scheme Parameter tab 2. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. Note: For 1+1 HSB/SD protection type, EPS restoration criteria is always dimmed. The restoration criteria selected for HSB protection is applied to EPS automatically.
Page 769: Figure 581 Hsb Protection Scheme Parameter Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision protection scheme parameters Figure 581 HSB Protection Scheme Parameter tab 2. Select HSB Protection in the resource tree area. Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available. 3.
Page 770: Figure 582 Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameter Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision protection scheme parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 582 Rx Radio Protection Scheme Parameter tab 2. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 3. Select Protection Scheme Parameters Tab. 4. From the Restoration Criteria partition, verify restoration criteria selection and provision if required: a.
Page 771 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type 58 Provision Protection Type 58.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to provision protection type on a pair of Core-E or CorEvo cards, transponder cards, and radio transceivers in the system. 58.2 Prerequisites Both Core cards, transponder cards, and radio transceivers must be enabled before 1+1 EPS protection can be provisioned.
Page 772 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual 58.4 Procedure This section provides the following procedures: • To provision MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Protection Type • To provision E1/DS1 Protection Type • To provision DS3 Protection Type •...
Page 773: Figure 584 Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Transceiver Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type Figure 584 MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Transceiver Settings tab 3. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select: no Protection, 1+1 HSB/ SD, or 1+1 FD protection type. 4. Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens.
Page 774: Figure 585 Mpt-Hl Or Mpt-Hlc Protection Type Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual Figure 585 MPT-HL or MPT-HLC Protection Type provisioned To provision E1/DS1 Protection Type 1. Select the MSS/DS1 or MSS/E1 card to provision with protection in the resource tree area.
Page 775: Figure 586 Provision P32E1Ds1 Protection Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type Figure 586 Provision P32E1DS1 Protection Type 3. Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens. 4. Click OK.
Page 776: Figure 587 P32E1Ds1 Protection Type Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual Figure 587 P32E1DS1 Protection Type provisioned To provision DS3 Protection Type 1. Select MSS/DS3 card to provision with protection in the resource tree area. This selection should also highlight the MSS/P2E3DS3 (DS3) card in blue on the graphical representation of the MSS shelf in the resource list area.
Page 777: Figure 588 Provision P2E3Ds3 Protection Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type Figure 588 Provision P2E3DS3 Protection Type 3. Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens. 4. Click OK.
Page 778: Figure 589 P2E3Ds3 Protection Type Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual Figure 589 P2E3DS3 Protection Type provisioned To provision SDH Protection Type Note: When provisioning ports for 1+1 EPS Protection, provision the main ports. Then only enable the spare ports. Then re-provision 1+1 EPS protection. Note: It is not possible to enable a port while 1+1 EPS protection is enabled.
Page 779: Figure 590 Provision Sdh Protection Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type Figure 590 Provision SDH Protection Type 3. Click Apply. Protection information updating window opens. 4. Click OK.
Page 780: Figure 591 Sdh Protection Type Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual Figure 591 SDH Protection Type provisioned To provision MPT ODU Protection Type Caution: RPS cable is mandatory with MPT-HC-HQAM or MPT-XP-HQAM in 1+1 configuration when channel spacing is higher than 30 MHz and the HQAM radio is not MPT-HC compatible.
Page 781 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type Note: The following notes apply: •Spare MPT ODU must be enabled prior to provisioning MPT ODU protection type. •MPT ODU 1+1 radio protection is not supported on Transceiver enabled on Core-E Ethernet ports.
Page 782: Figure 592 Provision Mpt Odu Protection Type
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual Figure 592 Provision MPT ODU Protection Type 2. From the Protection Type drop-down menu, select: no Protection, 1+1 HSB/ SD, or 1+1 FD protection type. 3. From the Protect Port drop-down menu, select Slot#n Port#m. 4.
Page 783: Figure 593 Mpt Odu Protection Type Selection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Provision Protection Type Figure 593 MPT ODU Protection Type selection Protection information updating window opens. 5. Click OK.
Page 784: Figure 594 Mpt Odu Protection Type Provisioned
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Provision Protection Type WebEML User Manual Figure 594 MPT ODU Protection Type provisioned...
Page 785: Configure Radio Parameters
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 59 Configure radio parameters 59.1 Purpose This chapter describes the radio parameters and provides procedures to configure radio parameters. 59.2 General To aid in correct provisioning of the radio parameters, establish communication with the radio (MPT-HC, MPT-HC-HQAM, MPT-XP, MPT-XP-HQAM, 9558HC, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT-HLS).
Page 786: Table 6 Configurations In Monodirectional Links
MSS shelves. Note: All supported channel plans do not support all possible radio profile combinations. For a table of supported profiles per radio channel plan, see the 9500 MPR Product Information Manual Engineering Specifications section. 59.2.1 Monodirectional links For the management of monodirectional radio links, different configurations are needed on each side of the link.
Page 787 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Table 6 Configurations in monodirectional links (Continued) Parameter Tx only node Rx only node No Tx Radio Alarms alarm profile — Must be configured in the radio panel (otherwise all the Tx Radio alarms will be raised) Tx Mute...
Page 788: Figure 595 Mpt-Hc Radio Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual To open the Radio Main View 1. From the Equipment tab, select the radio in the resource tree: MSS/RADIO, MPT-HL, MPT-HLC, or MPT ODU Dir#-Ch#. The selected radio type in the resource list will be highlighted in blue.
Page 789: Figure 596 Mpt Odu Radio Main View Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 596 MPT ODU Radio Main View Settings tab To administer the MPT-HL transceiver 1. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HL radio protection type, go to step 2. b.
Page 790 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual k. To Provision the MPT-HL Synchronization Status Messaging, go to step l. To Provision the MPT-HL Point to Point Protocol settings, go to step 35. m. To Provision the PKT throughput booster setting, go to step 36.
Page 791: Figure 597 Mpt-Hl Transceiver Protection Type Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 597 MPT-HL transceiver protection type provisioning 5. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HL radio for fixed modulation, go to step 6. b. To Provision the MPT-HL radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 9.
Page 792: Figure 598 Mpt-Hl Settings Tab For Fixed Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 598 MPT-HL Settings tab for fixed modulation 7. Provision MPT-HL radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one supported by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
Page 793 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters v. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired shifter value. vi. When the MPT-HL is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq (KHz) field is automatically populated.
Page 794: Figure 599 Mpt-Hl Settings Tab For Adaptive Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 599 MPT-HL Settings tab for adaptive modulation 10. Provision MPT-HL radio port: Note: Depending on the modem profile selected, the Tx power may become out of range. If this occurs, provision the Tx power to the desired level or to one supported by the modem profile to clear the warning message.
Page 795 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters v. In the Supported Modulation panel, choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation. The schemes must be contiguous. vi. Click on the Data Help button in the Shifter panel. The MPT-HL Shifter Data Help window opens.
Page 796: Figure 600 Mpt-Hl 1+1 Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 600 MPT-HL 1+1 settings tab 13. Provision the MPT-HL 1+1 spare radio channel: i. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. The Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel...
Page 797 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters b. To Provision the MPT-HL Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 19. 15. Provision the MPT-HL manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab;...
Page 798: Figure 601 Mpt-Hl Settings With Atpc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 601 MPT-HL settings with ATPC 21. Provision the MPT-HL radio channel ATPC: i. Select ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). iii.
Page 799: Figure 602 Mpt-Hl Transceiver Protection Criteria Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 24. Provision the spare MPT-HL radio channel ATPC: i. Select the ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). iii. Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-90.0 / -20.0 dBm). iv.
Page 800 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Note: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available. 26. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 27. From the Restoration Criteria panel, verify the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i.
Page 801: Figure 603 Mpt-Hl Additional Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 603 MPT-HL Additional Settings tab 33. Provision MPT-HL radio link identifier: i. Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255). iii.
Page 802 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 35. Provision the MPT-HL Point to Point Protocol settings i. From the PPP RF panel, select the Enabled check box; see Figure 603. ii. Select the Routing IP Protocol radio button: (OSPF or None). iii.
Page 803 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters i. To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43. j. To Provision the spare MPT-HLC ATPC, go to step 47. k. To Provision the MPT-HLC radio protection scheme, go to step 48.
Page 804: Figure 604 Xpic Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual ii. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/ XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step ii). iii. Click Apply. iv. Provision Vertical radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Vertical. v.
Page 805: Figure 606 Provision Mpt-Hlc Co-Channel Xpic Association
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 606 Provision MPT-HLC co-channel XPIC association 7. Click OK. 8. Click Apply. 9. Click Close. 10. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel.
Page 806: Figure 607 Provisioned Mpt-Hlc 1+0 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 607 Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 11. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel.
Page 807: Figure 608 Provisioned Mpt-Hlc 1+0 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 608 Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 12. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42. b.
Page 808: Figure 609 Provisioned Mpt-Hlc 1+1 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual c. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/XPIC). d. Click Apply. e. Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal. f. Click Apply. Figure 609 Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 15.
Page 809: Figure 610 Provision Mpt-Hlc 1+1 Xpic Association
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters • TX Freq • Rx Freq iii. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/ XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step iii).
Page 810: Figure 611 Provisioned Mpt-Hlc 1+1 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 20. Click Close. 21. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel.
Page 811: Figure 612 Provisioned Mpt-Hlc 1+1 Vertical Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 612 Provisioned MPT-HLC 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel 23. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 42. b.
Page 812: Figure 613 Mpt-Hlc Transceiver Protection Type Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
Page 813: Figure 614 Mpt-Hlc Settings Tab For Fixed Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 28. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29. b. To Provision the MPT-HLC radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32. 29.
Page 814 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual ii. Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens. iii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing, modulation scheme, and option.
Page 815: Figure 615 Mpt-Hlc Settings Tab For Adaptive Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 615. Figure 615 MPT-HLC Settings tab for adaptive modulation 33.
Page 816 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual iv. In 1+1 HSB configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE. v. In the Supported Modulation panel, choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation.
Page 817: Figure 616 Mpt-Hlc 1+1 Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 616 MPT-HLC 1+1 settings tab 36. Provision MPT-HLC 1+1 spare radio channel: a. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. b. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel...
Page 818 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual b. To Provision the MPT-HLC Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 44. 38. Provision the MPT-HLC manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab;...
Page 819: Figure 617 Mpt-Hlc Settings With Atpc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 617 MPT-HLC settings with ATPC 44. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel ATPC: i. Select the ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). iii.
Page 820: Figure 618 Mpt-Hlc Transceiver Protection Criteria Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 47. Provision Spare MPT-HLC radio channel ATPC: i. Select the ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). iii. Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-90.0 / -20.0 dBm). iv.
Page 821 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Danger: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available. 49. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. i. From the Restoration Criteria panel, verify the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: ii.
Page 822: Figure 619 Mpt-Hlc Additional Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 619 MPT-HLC Additional Settings tab 55. Provision MPT-HLC radio link identifier: i. Select Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255). iii.
Page 823 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 57. Provision MPT-HLC radio channel Synchronization SSM: i. Select the Synchronization SSM Enabled check box. ii. Click Apply. 58. Provision the MPT-HLC Point to Point Protocol settings Note: If the MPT-HLC is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio.
Page 824 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 62. In the Alarm Profile panel, click on the icon. The Alarm Severity Profile window opens. 63. Choose an alarm severity profile. Select the Show details button for more information if needed.
Page 825: Figure 620 Mpt-Hlc Maintenance Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 620 MPT-HLC Maintenance tab 69. Squelch the main or diversity receiver: i. Select the Rx Main or Rx Diversity check box. ii. Click Apply. 70. Release squelch on the main or diversity receiver: i.
Page 826: Figure 621 Measurements Tab For Mpt-Hlc
72. Enter the measured Tx and Rx Branching Loss values. The Diversity Rx Branching Loss can also be configured if the diversity combiner is in use. If measured values are not available, see the 9500 MPR-A MPT-HL Engineering Specifications for information.
Page 827 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters g. To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38. h. To Provision the spare MPT-HLS RTPC, go to step 41. i. To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43.
Page 828 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual • Rx Freq ii. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/ XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step ii). iii. Click Apply. iv.
Page 829: Figure 622 Provisioned Mpt-Hls 1+0 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 622 Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 11. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel.
Page 830: Figure 623 Provisioned Mpt-Hls 1+1 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual i. Provision 1+1 HSB protection group. See step for detailed steps to provision radio channel protection type. ii. Provision main radio channel. See step for detailed steps to provision radio channel parameters.
Page 831 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters • Mode • Reference Channel Spacing • Modulation • Shifter • TX Freq • Rx Freq iii. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/ XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step iii).
Page 832: Figure 624 Provision Mpt-Hls 1+1 Xpic Association
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 624 Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 XPIC association 18. Click OK. 19. Click Apply. 20. Click Close. 21. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel.
Page 833: Figure 625 Provisioned Mpt-Hls 1+1 Vertical Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 625 Provisioned MPT-HLS 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel 23. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC), go to step 38. b.
Page 834: Figure 626 Mpt-Hls Transceiver Protection Type Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
Page 835: Figure 627 Mpt-Hls Settings Tab For Fixed Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 28. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for fixed modulation, go to step 29. b. To Provision the MPT-HLS radio for adaptive modulation, go to step 32. 29.
Page 836 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual ii. Click on the Data Help button under the Mode field. The Data Help window opens. iii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing, modulation scheme, and option.
Page 837: Figure 628 Mpt-Hls Settings Tab For Adaptive Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab; see Figure 628. Figure 628 MPT-HLS Settings tab for adaptive modulation 33.
Page 838 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual iv. In 1+1 HSB or FD configurations, from the Driving MSE drop-down menu, choose Lowest or Highest MSE. v. In the Supported Modulation panel, choose all the modulation schemes to be used by the adaptive modulation.
Page 839: Figure 629 Mpt-Hls 1+1 Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 629 MPT-HLS 1+1 settings tab 36. Provision MPT-HLS 1+1 spare radio channel: a. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. b. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel...
Page 840 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual b. To Provision the MPT-HLS Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 43. 38. Provision the MPT-HLS manual transmit power level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab;...
Page 841: Figure 630 Mpt-Hls Settings With Atpc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 630 MPT-HLS settings with ATPC 44. Provision MPT-HLS radio channel ATPC: i. Select the ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). If the ATPC Range is over 15 dBm, a warning window appears;...
Page 842 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 45. Select an action. a. To Provision the spare MPT-HLS ATPC, go to step 46. b. To Provision the MPT-HLS radio protection scheme, go to step 48. 46.
Page 843: Figure 632 Mpt-Hls Transceiver Protection Criteria Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 632 MPT-HLS transceiver protection criteria provisioning Danger: For 1+1 FD protection type, HSB Protection is not available. 49. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. i.
Page 844: Figure 633 Mpt-Hls Additional Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 52. Select Rx Radio Protection in the resource tree area. 53. From the Restoration Criteria panel, verify the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i. Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button. ii.
Page 845 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters ii. Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255). iii. Enter the Sent Identifier value (0 to 255). iv. Click Apply. 56. Provision the MPT-HLS Synchronization Status Messaging Note: If the MPT-HLS is part of a LAG, you cannot change the SSM or PPP settings on an individual radio.
Page 846 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Open the appropriate radio main view and select the Additional Settings tab; see Figure 633. 60. Provision MPT-HLC radio PKT throughput booster: Figure 633 for the following steps: i.
Page 847: Figure 634 Mpt-Hls Maintenance Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 67. Provision the radio channel Encryption: i. Click on the Edit passphrase button.The Edit passphrase window opens. ii. Enter and confirm the new passphrase. iii. Click Apply in the Edit passphrase window. 68.
Page 848 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual ii. Click Apply. To administer the MPT ODU 1. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT ODU power scheme, go to step 2. b. To Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 7.
Page 849 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters For MPT ODU enabled on a Core Ethernet port, P8ETH Ethernet port, EASv2 without PFoE support, or an MSS-1 Core without PFoE support, an external source of power is required. The external source may be either a Power Injector card/Box.
Page 850: Figure 635 Mpt Odu Power Source Settings Tab (Mptacc Card)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 635 MPT ODU Power Source Settings tab (MPTACC card) 6. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT ODU co-channel XPIC configuration, go to step 7. b.
Page 851: Figure 636 Xpic Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters iii. Click Apply. iv. Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal. v. Click Apply. 9. Provision MPT ODU 1+0 Vertical XPIC Configuration: i. Provision 1+0 Vertical radio channel. Provision the Vertical radio channel using the following radio parameters identical to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step •...
Page 852: Figure 637 Xpic Configuration Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 637 XPIC configuration window 11. Select Horizontal Radio port and drag to draw line to Vertical RADIO port. XPIC Association pop-up displays. See Figure 638.
Page 853: Figure 638 Provision Mpt Odu Co-Channel Xpic Association
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 638 Provision MPT ODU co-channel XPIC association 12. Click OK. 13. Click Apply. 14. Click Close. 15. From the MPT Main View, select the 1+0 Horizontal radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel.
Page 854: Figure 639 Provisioned Mpt Odu 1+0 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 639 Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 16. From the MPT Main View, select the Vertical 1+0 radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for Associated Interface Horizontal radio channel.
Page 855: Figure 640 Provisioned Mpt Odu 1+0 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 640 Provisioned MPT ODU 1+0 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 17. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step b.
Page 856: Figure 641 Provisioned Mpt Odu 1+1 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual iii. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration (Std/XPIC). iv. Click Apply. v. Provision Horizontal radio channel XPIC Configuration Polarization to Horizontal. vi. Click Apply. Figure 641 Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Horizontal XPIC radio channel 20.
Page 857: Figure 642 Provision Mpt Odu 1+1 Xpic Association
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters e. TX Freq f. Rx Freq iii. From the Option drop-down menu, choose gain configuration identical (Std/ XPIC) to the values provisioned for the horizontal radio channel (step iii).
Page 858: Figure 643 Provisioned Mpt Odu 1+1 Horizontal Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 25. Click Close. 26. From the MPT Main View, select the Horizontal radio channel and verify the correct radio channel is shown for the Associated Interface Vertical radio channel.
Page 859: Figure 644 Provisioned Mpt Odu 1+1 Vertical Xpic Radio Channel
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 644 Provisioned MPT ODU 1+1 Vertical XPIC radio channel 28. Select an action. a. To Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC), go to step b.
Page 860: Figure 645 Mpt Odu Transceiver Protection Type Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 30. Select the Settings tab. Note: Before changing the protection type provisioning, you must first apply the No Protection option to the protection type. For example: If 1+1 HSB is provisioned and 1+1 FD is needed, first select No Protection and click Apply, then select 1+1 FD and click Apply.
Page 861: Figure 646 Dialog Box With Virtual Cable And Hqam
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 34. Select Protection Schemes tab. 35. Select Protection Scheme Parameters tab. 36. Provision RPS Cable Configuration: − Select the Physical Cable check box for Physical Cable or leave it unselected for Virtual Cable.
Page 862: Figure 648 Mpt-Hc Settings Tab For Fixed Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 38. Select an action. a. To Provision the radio for fixed modulation, go to step 39. b. To Provision the radio for Adaptive Modulation, go to step 42. 39.
Page 863: Figure 649 Mpt-Hqam Settings Tab For Fixed Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 649 MPT-HQAM Settings tab for fixed modulation 40. Provision the radio port: i. In the Mode field, select the Preset radio button. ii. For MPT-HQAM transceivers only, select the MPT-HC Compatibility check box to configure the MPT-HQAM with a profile that is compatible with an MPT-HC, if required.
Page 864 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency ix.
Page 865: Figure 650 Mpt-Hc Settings Tab For Adaptive Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 650 MPT-HC Settings tab for adaptive modulation...
Page 866: Figure 651 Mpt-Hqam Settings Tab For Adaptive Modulation
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 651 MPT-HQAM Settings tab for adaptive modulation 43. Provision the radio port: i. In the Mode field, choose the Adaptive radio button. ii. For MPT-HQAM transceivers only, select the MPT-HC Compatibility check box to configure the MPT-HQAM with a profile that is compatible with an MPT-HC, if required.
Page 867 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters viii. When the radio is connected to the MSS shelf, the Channel #1 TxFreq(KHz) field is automatically populated. If the radio is not connected, enter the TX RF Frequency within the allowed range.
Page 868: Figure 652 Mpt-Hc 1+1 Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 652 MPT-HC 1+1 Settings tab 46. Provision MPT ODU 1+1 spare radio channel: i. Enter the TX Frequency within the allowed range. ii. The Rx Freq (KHz) displays the Rx RF Frequency. Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency +/- Shifter Frequency (based on the high or low channel...
Page 869 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters b. To Provision the MPT ODU Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC), go to step 53. 48. Provision the MPT ODU Manual Transmit Power Level (RTPC) Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Settings tab;...
Page 870: Figure 653 Mpt-Hc Settings Tab With Atpc
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 653 MPT-HC Settings tab with ATPC 54. Provision MPT ODU radio channel ATPC: i. Select the ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min and Max transmit power value range (dBm). iii.
Page 871: Figure 654 Mpt Odu Transceiver Protection Criteria Provisioning
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters i. Select the ATPC Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Min-Max transmit power value range (dBm). iii. Enter the Remote ATPC Rx Threshold (-min / -max dBm). iv.
Page 872 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual 59. Select Equipment Protection in the resource tree area. 60. From the Restoration Criteria panel, verify the Restoration Criteria selection and provision if required: i. Select the Not Revertive or Revertive radio button. ii.
Page 873: Figure 655 Mpt Odu Protection Restoration Criteria Provisioning Rx Radio
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Figure 655 MPT ODU Protection Restoration Criteria provisioning Rx radio 65. Select the Equipment tab. 66. Provision the MPT ODU link identifier Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Additional Settings tab;...
Page 874: Figure 656 Mpt-Hc Additional Settings Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 656 MPT-HC Additional Settings tab 67. Provision MPT ODU radio link identifier: i. Select the Link Identifier Configuration Enabled check box. ii. Enter the Expected Identifier value (0 to 255). iii.
Page 875 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters 69. Provision the MPT ODU Point to Point Protocol settings i. From the PPP RF panel, select the Enabled check box; see Figure 656. ii. Select Routing IP Protocol: (OSPF or None). iii.
Page 876: Figure 657 Mpt-Hqam Maintenance Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual ii. Enter and confirm the new passphrase. iii. Click Apply in the Edit passphrase window. 73. Configure the Low Voltage Alarm for the MPT-HQAM Open the appropriate radio main view depending on your radio configuration and select the Maintenance tab;...
Page 877 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters When the alarm is raised, the alarm is cleared when the measurement of the voltage, automatically done by the MPT, reaches the threshold value configured plus 3 V. The operator should ensure that this voltage can be operatively reached.
Page 878 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Note: The Channel #1 Rx Freq (KHz) field displays the Rx RF Frequency and is the result of the following calculation: RX Frequency = TX Frequency - Shifter Frequency viii.
Page 879 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters iii. In the 9500MPR MPT ODU ACM Modem Profiles Data Help window, double-click on the table row for the desired channel spacing (5 MHz, 30 MHz, 40 MHz, or 50MHz), reference modulation, and option (Std or Std// XPIC).
Page 880: Figure 658 Mpt Odu Maintenance Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Configure radio parameters WebEML User Manual Figure 658 MPT ODU Maintenance tab 2. Select an action. a. To mute the transmitter indefinitely, choose the On radio button. b. To provide a duration that the transmitter will be muted, go to step 3. Note: It is not possible to configure a timed Tx mute and a non-timed Tx mute at the same time.
Page 881: Figure 659 Mpt Odu Maintenance Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Configure radio parameters Note: If the NE is still reachable after the transmitter is muted, you can change the timeout parameter. The new value will overwrite the previous timeout and the timer starts from the current timestamp.
Page 882 To remove XPIC 1. Clear any alarms causing an automatic Tx Mute on the radios; see the 9500 MPR Alarm Clearing User Manual. Caution: If an XPIC association is removed while an automatic Tx Mute is active, the Tx Mute may remain on the system after the removal.
Page 883 IPv6 without performing pre-provisioning, default IP and OSPFv3 settings will be applied. 60.2 General The 9500 MPR supports IPv6 addressing. The NE Local IPv6 address is a Global Unicast address which identifies the NE in the DCN. The default address is FEC0:0:0:1::1. The prefix length is fixed to 128.
Page 884: Figure 660 Ipv6 Pre-Provisioning Main Menu Bar Path
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning WebEML User Manual Figure 660 IPv6 Pre-provisioning main menu bar path 2. The first IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting window opens. See Figure 661. Figure 661 IPv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 1 of 3 window 3.
Page 885: Figure 662 Ipv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 2 Of 3 Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning 5. In the TMN In-Band #1 Configuration panel, enter the IPv6 address of the TMN In-Band #1 port in the IPv6 Address field, and the prefix length in the Prefix Length field.
Page 886: Figure 663 Create Ipv6 Static Route Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning WebEML User Manual Figure 663 Create IPv6 Static Route window 10. Select desired Host or Network Address Choice radio button: Host or Network. 11. Which IP Static Routing Configuration was selected? a.
Page 887: Figure 664 Ipv6 Pre-Provisioning Setting Step 3 Of 3 Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning 16. Enter the Gateway IP Address in the Gateway IPv6 Address text field. 17. Go to step 19. 18. From the Point to Point Interface drop-down menu, select an interface Id. 19.
Page 888 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform IPv6 pre-provisioning WebEML User Manual...
Page 889 Use the Provisioning Tool 61 Use the Provisioning Tool 61.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures for provisioning 9500 MPR equipment using the Provisioning Tool. Some equipment and parameters must be provisioned using WebEML. See the Product Information Guide for more information.
Page 890 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual The following buttons appear on every screen: • Restore: allows to restore in the screen the initial data without any change • Prev: the procedure goes back to the previous screen (the changed data may be lost after the Warning message) •...
Page 891: Figure 665 Provisioning Tool Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool • To configure the Network configuration screen • To configure the Trusted managers screen • To view and save the configuration • To open the Provisioning tool To open the Provisioning tool 1.
Page 892: Figure 666 Report Panel For Opened Configuration File
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual After a configuration file is opened, a Report panel displays for the existing file, see Figure 666. Figure 666 Report panel for opened configuration file If the file is correct, click on the Next button to start the provisioning. b.
Page 893: Figure 667 Mss Configuration Screen Example
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 667 MSS Configuration screen example 4. Click on the Next button. The Core Configuration screen opens. 5. In the Core Configuration screen, perform the following for each Ethernet port. Figure 668.
Page 894: Figure 668 Core Configuration Screen Example
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual iii. If autonegotiation is disabled, select a fixed speed and direction pair in the “Speed - Duplex” area. iv. If autonegotiation is enabled, Synch-E can be configured: choose Synchronous and select the operating mode: Master or Slave.
Page 895: Figure 669 Mptacc Configuration With Two Units In The Row
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool 6. Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration. To configure the MPT Access peripheral configuration screen 1. In the MPT Access area enable the port to be used to interface the MPT. Port#1 and port#2 are electrical Ethernet ports;...
Page 896: Figure 670 1+1 Configuration With Mptacc Units
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual 3. Configure the protection if needed: In the MPT Protection Configuration area select the Main port and the MPT Spare port (in the example of the following figure s5p1 means Slot #5 Port #1) and in the Port Type field select the protection configuration: 1+1 HSB or 1+1 4.
Page 897 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool 6. Click on the Next button. The MPT configuration screen opens. To configure the MPT Configuration screen 1. Configure the following parameters as needed: − User Label −...
Page 898: Figure 671 Xpic Polarization Selection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 671 XPIC polarization selection − Link Identifier: select the checkbox to enable Link Identifier • Enter a number from 1 to 255 for Expected. The number must match the associated Transmitter ID at the other end of the hop.
Page 899: Figure 672 Mpt Configuration Showing Mpt-Hqam
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 672 MPT configuration showing MPT-HQAM (1+0 with fixed modulation) To perform the configuration: i. Do not put a check mark in the “Use Adaptive Modulation” check box. ii.
Page 900: Figure 673 Data Help Window For Profile Area (Fixed Modulation)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 673 Data Help window for Profile area (fixed modulation) iii. In the Data Help window, double-click on the row showing the correct Channel Spacing, Modulation and Option. iv.
Page 901: Figure 674 Mpt Configuration Screen (1+0 With Adaptive Modulation)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 674 MPT configuration screen (1+0 with adaptive modulation) i. Put a check mark in the Use Adaptive Modulation check box. ii. Click on the Data Help button in the Profile area. The Data Help window opens, see Figure 675 for an example.
Page 902: Figure 675 Data Help Window For Profile Area (Adaptive Modulation)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 675 Data Help window for Profile area (adaptive modulation) iii. In the Data Help window, double click on the row showing the correct Channel Spacing, Modulation and Option. iv.
Page 903: Figure 676 Data Help Window For The Channel Area
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 676 Data Help window for the Channel area − In a 1+1 configuration, Channel 0 is also available. In HSB configuration the shifter value is the same for both channels, see Figure 677.
Page 904: Figure 677 1+1 Hsb Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 677 1+1 HSB Configuration...
Page 905: Figure 678 1+1 Fd Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 678 1+1 FD Configuration 5. Configure ATPC or Manual Transmit Power Control. 6. Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration. To configure the P32E1DS1 unit configuration screen for the ANSI market Figure 679 shows the DS1 configuration screen.
Page 906: Figure 679 Ds1 Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 679 DS1 configuration screen Configure the tributaries individually, or use the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to configure the following for all tributaries: − Signal Mode: Disabled, Framed, Unframed, Framed SF or Framed ESF −...
Page 907 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered. −...
Page 908: Figure 680 E1 Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 680 E1 configuration Configure the tributaries individually, or use the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to configure the following for all tributaries: − Signal Mode: Disabled, Framed, Unframed, Framed SF or Framed ESF −...
Page 909 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Enter an ID in the One-Shot Tributaries Configuration to provide the ECID for port #1. The tool will number the other tributaries consecutively from the number entered. −...
Page 910: Figure 681 Sdhacc Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 681 SDHACC configuration screen i. Put a check mark in the Port Status box to enable the STM-1. ii. Set the Auto Laser Shutdown: Enabled/Disabled ForcedOn/Disabled ForcedOff.
Page 911: Figure 682 Sdhchan Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool viii. Node Timing: timing from the network element clock as defined in G.8261. The enabling of the Node Timing is applied to both the STM-1. By enabling the Node Timing the SMT-1 streams in Rx side are retimed at the output with the network element clock.
Page 912 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual v. Enable the J0, if required, by selecting one of the two modes (SixteenBytesFrame/OneRepeatedByte) in the Expected Receiving Value field and enter the expected value and in the Sending J0 field select one of the two modes and enter the value to be transmitted.
Page 913 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool ii. If the working mode is set to Transport, enable or disable autonegotiation and flow control. iii. If autonegotiation is disabled, select a fixed speed and direction pair in the “Speed - Duplex”...
Page 914: Figure 683 Easv2 Configuration Screen: Electrical Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 683 EASv2 configuration screen: electrical ports...
Page 915: Figure 684 Easv2 Configuration Screen: Optical Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 684 EASv2 configuration screen: optical ports Figure 685 shows EASv2 units in slots 7 and 8.
Page 916: Figure 685 Easv2 Protection Configuration
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 685 EASv2 protection configuration In the MPT Protection Configuration area select the MPT Main port and the MPT Spare port (in the example figure s7p5 means Slot #7 Port #5) and in the Prot Type field select the protection configuration: 1+1 HSB or 1+1 FD.
Page 917: Figure 686 Easv2 Protection
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 686 EASv2 protection After one port is enabled the screen for MPT configuration appears. 5. Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration. To configure the LAG configuration screen 1.
Page 918: Figure 687 Lag Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 687 LAG configuration screen Perform the following to create an L1 Radio LAG: 1. Press the Create button. The LAG Creation window opens; see Figure 688.
Page 919: Figure 689 Created L1 Radio Lag
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool • ID: LAG identification (from 1 to 14) • Name: optional field (max. 32 characters). You can name the ports in the LAG and the LAG itself separately. •...
Page 920: Figure 690 Available Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual 5. Select a port in the Available Ports area and click on the Right Arrow button to move the selected port in the Added Ports area. The Available Ports field shows only the ports which can be configured as Lowest index port (MPTs with odd numbers);...
Page 921 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Note: The PPP RF channel for TMN is managed here at LAG level and not at radio level. In case of 2 parallel LAG groups, the PPP rules are the same as for Nx(1+0) and Nx(1+1). The TMN RF option must be disabled on all links except one.
Page 922: Figure 692 To Configure 1+0 Xpic
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 692 To configure 1+0 XPIC Figure 693 shows two MPT-HC in XPIC configuration.
Page 923: Figure 693 1+0 Xpic
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 693 1+0 XPIC To remove the association, double click on the connection line, remove the check mark, click on OK and Next. 3. To configure 1+1 in the TRDS: i.
Page 924: Figure 694 To Configure 1+1 Xpic
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 694 To configure 1+1 XPIC Figure 695 shows two MPT-HC in the XPIC configuration.
Page 925: Figure 695 1+1 Xpic
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 695 1+1 XPIC To remove the association, double click on the connection line, remove the check mark, click on OK and Next. 4. Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration. To configure the Synchronization configuration screen Figure 696 shows the synchronization configuration screen.
Page 926: Figure 696 Synchronization Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 696 Synchronization Configuration screen Perform the following: i. Select the primary or secondary source from the Sources drop-down menus; for example, Any available DS1. The list of sources in the drop- down menu is pre-defined: it does not change based on the configuration.
Page 927 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool − 1.024 MHz, electrical levels according to G.703, clause 13 with the following exception: timing correctly scaled from 2.048 MHz to 1.024 MHz 3. Configure a Wait-to-Restore time as needed. 4.
Page 928: Figure 697 Scheduler Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 697 Scheduler Configuration screen For each queue, click in the cell to change the setting. i. Choose the Mode: SP (Strict Priority) or DWRR (Deficit Weighted Round Robin) ii.
Page 929: Figure 698 Queue Size Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 698 Queue size configuration screen For each queue and for each radio direction, perform the following as needed: − Double click on the relevant field to change the buffer size (in Bytes). −...
Page 930: Figure 699 Qos Classification Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 699 QoS classification screen For IEEE 802.1p, see step 5. For DiffServ, see step 6. Figure 700 shows the IEEE 802.1p configuration screen, with default settings.
Page 931: Figure 700 Ieee 802.1P
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 700 IEEE 802.1p Perform the following to classify the Priority Code Point to a specific queue: i. Change the classification on the left area clicking on a radio button. The modification will appear in yellow.
Page 932: Figure 701 Diffserv
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 701 DiffServ Perform the following to complete the classification of the DiffServ Code Point to a specific queue: i. Change the classification on the left area by clicking on the radio buttons. The modifications will appear in yellow.
Page 933: Figure 702 Read-Only Table
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 702 Read-only table Click on the Table form (per point) button to close the table. iii. Click on Next to complete the configuration. 7. Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration. To configure the Bridge configuration screen 1.
Page 934: Figure 703 802.1D Vlan Management
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Note: 802.1ad (Provider Bridge) must be configured using WebEML. The MSS Subrack panel does not appear in the Bridge configuration screen by default. Click on the MSS Summary button to view it. Figure 703 802.1D VLAN management...
Page 935: Figure 704 802.1Q Vlan Management (Default Vlan Only)
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 704 802.1Q VLAN management (default VLAN only) 2. Perform the following to create a VLAN: i. Click on the ADD VLan button. The Create VLAN window opens. ii.
Page 936 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual All the user Ethernet ports and all the Radio directions can be considered. Both enabled and disabled user Ethernet ports (radio ports when declared are implicitly enabled) can be member of a VLAN. This means that a disabled port can be configured as a member of a VLAN and a port already member of a VLAN can be disabled continuing to be a member of the same VLAN.
Page 937: Figure 705 Example Of Created Vlans
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 705 Example of created VLANs Note: When a board on which there is at least one port member of a VLAN is removed from the MSS configuration screen, the management system advises the operator that there are ports on the board that are members of a VLAN, asking confirmation of the operation.
Page 938: Figure 706 Port Vlan Configuration - Core-E Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual − Untagged frames on user Ethernet ports: Accepted or Discarded. − If the untagged frames are accepted, the VLAN-ID and Priority fields must be configured. Only VLAN-ID values already defined (in the VLAN management menu) can be configured for this purpose.
Page 939: Figure 707 Port Vlan Configuration - Easv2 Ports
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Figure 707 Port VLAN configuration - EASv2 ports 2. Click on the Next button. The next screen to open depends on the configuration. To configure the Network configuration screen Figure 708 shows the Network Configuration screen.
Page 940: Figure 708 Network Configuration Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 708 Network Configuration screen Configure the following IP addresses: − Local IP Address: it is the Controller IP address (default IP address = 10.0.1.2 with fixed mask 255.255.255.255) The NE Local IP Address can be reused on one of the other TMN interfaces.
Page 941 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool Warning: If remote NEs have to be reached from this NE, you need to configure the Routing Protocol of the TMN-RF channel, if the remote NE is connected through the radio link or of the NMS Ethernet Port, if the remote NE is connected through the Ethernet cable.
Page 942: Figure 709 Trusted Managers Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual Figure 709 Trusted Managers screen To activate a trusted manager: i. Click on Add Manager ii. Double-click on the IP Address column and enter the IP address of the SNMP manager.
Page 943: Figure 710 Configuration Report
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Use the Provisioning Tool 1. The Report Panel shows the configuration created; see Figure 710. Figure 710 Configuration report Click on the Save button to save the configuration as shown or click on the Prev button to return to a previous screen.
Page 944 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Use the Provisioning Tool WebEML User Manual...
Page 945 1. Log In to NE. For detailed steps to log in to an NE using a web browser, see in to and out of system. The 9500 MPR Web Server displays. Active Alarms is the default web server window. 2. Select Configuration → Configuration Setting. The Configuration Setting screen opens.
Page 946: Figure 711 Configuration Settings Screen
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Apply a configuration using the Web Server WebEML User Manual Caution: Clearing the NE database will reset the local IP address. If the NE is already configured, the DB CLEAR and NE RESTART button appears on the Configuration Setting screen.
Page 947: Figure 712 Configuration Setting Confirmation Summary
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Apply a configuration using the Web Server Figure 712 Configuration Setting confirmation summary...
Page 948 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Apply a configuration using the Web Server WebEML User Manual...
Page 949 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Equipment functions Equipment functions Note: Performance monitoring on affected equipment should be disabled before making configuration changes. • Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback • Digital Core Facing Loopback • IF Cable loopback •...
Page 950 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Equipment functions WebEML User Manual...
Page 951 Loopback 63.1 Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback for the 9500 MPR. 63.2 General Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the signal from the CORE switch matrix to be transmitted by the PDH/SDH transponder card and replaces the signal received by the PDH/SDH transponder and sends the signal back to the CORE switch matrix.
Page 952: Figure 713 Core Facing Pdh Tributary Loopback Block Diagram
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 713 Core Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram Figure 714 Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram 63.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •...
Page 953: Figure 715 Main Equipment Window: Pdh E1/Ds1 Transponder Card Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1. In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback. For E1/DS1 loopback, see Figure 715.
Page 954: Figure 716 Main Equipment Window: Pdh Ds3 Transponder Card Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 716 Main Equipment Window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted...
Page 955: Figure 717 Main Equipment Window: Pdh Oc-3 Transponder Card Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback Figure 717 Main Equipment Window: PDH OC-3 Transponder Card highlighted 2. The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens. 3. Select Loopback tab. For E1, DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 718.
Page 956: Figure 718 Pdh Main View, Loopback Tab Ds1 Port Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 718 PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected...
Page 957: Figure 719 Sdh Main View, Loopback Tab Oc-3 Port#3.1 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback Figure 719 SDH main view, Loopback tab OC-3 Port#3.1 selected 6. Select the Active radio button in the Activation area. 7. Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields.
Page 958: Figure 720 Core Facing Pdh Ds1 Tributary Loopback Active
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 720 Core Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback active...
Page 959: Figure 721 Core Facing Sdh Tributary Loopback Active
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback Figure 721 Core Facing SDH Tributary Loopback active To deactivate a Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1. In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback.
Page 960 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual 6. Select Not Active radio-button in the Activation area. 7. Click Apply. Core Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is deactivated (Not Active). For PDH loopback, see Figure 718.
Page 961 64 Digital Core Facing Loopback 64.1 Purpose This chapter provides instructions to perform Digital Core Facing Loopback for the 9500 MPR. 64.2 General Digital Core Facing Loopback mode uses the signal to be transmitted by the MPT-HL/HLC/HC/XP Transceiver and replaces the signal received by the MPT-HL/ HLC/HC/XP Transceiver and sends the transmit signal back to the P8ETH/EASv2/ MPTACC card.
Page 962: Figure 722 Main Equipment Window: Radio Icon Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Digital Core Facing Loopback WebEML User Manual • To deactivate a Digital Core Facing Loopback To activate a Digital Core Facing Loopback 1. In the main equipment window, double-click on the Transceiver radio icon to perform Digital Core Facing Loopback.
Page 963: Figure 723 Radio Maintenance Tab
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Digital Core Facing Loopback Figure 723 Radio Maintenance tab 3. Select the Core Facing - Internal radio button in the Loopback area. 4. Select Active radio button in the Activation area. 5.
Page 964 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Digital Core Facing Loopback WebEML User Manual 3. Select the Not Active radio button in the Activation area. 4. Click on the Apply button. 5. Core facing Loopback is deactivated.
Page 965 Loopback 65.1 Purpose This chapter provides procedures to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback for the 9500 MPR. 65.2 General Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback mode uses the received line tributary input signal to the PDH/SDH transponder card and sends the signal back to the transmit line tributary output signal.
Page 966: Figure 724 Line Facing Pdh Tributary Loopback Block Diagram
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 724 Line Facing PDH Tributary Loopback block diagram Figure 725 Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback block diagram 65.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •...
Page 967: Figure 726 Main Equipment Window: Pdh E1/Ds1 Transponder Card Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback To activate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1. In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback.
Page 968: Figure 727 Main Equipment Window: Pdh Ds3 Transponder Card Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 727 Main Equipment window: PDH DS3 Transponder Card highlighted...
Page 969: Figure 728 Main Equipment Window: Sdh Transponder Card Highlighted
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback Figure 728 Main Equipment window: SDH Transponder Card highlighted i. The PDH/SDH Main View for the selected PDH/SDH transponder opens. ii. Select Loopback tab. For E1/DS1 or DS3 loopback, see Figure 729.
Page 970: Figure 729 Pdh Main View, Loopback Tab Ds1 Port Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 729 PDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port selected...
Page 971: Figure 730 Sdh Main View, Loopback Tab Ds1 Port#07 Selected
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback Figure 730 SDH main view, Loopback tab DS1 Port#07 selected v. Select the Active radio button in the Activation area. vi. Enter time out period (days, hours, minutes) in the Timeout Period (max 4 days) fields.
Page 972: Figure 731 Line Facing Pdh Ds1 Tributary Loopback Active
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 731 Line Facing PDH DS1 Tributary Loopback Active...
Page 973: Figure 732 Line Facing Sdh Tributary Loopback Active
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback Figure 732 Line Facing SDH Tributary Loopback Active To deactivate a Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback 1. In the main equipment window, double-click the PDH/SDH Transponder Card associated with the tributary to perform Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback.
Page 974 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback WebEML User Manual 6. Click Apply. 7. Line Facing PDH/SDH Tributary Loopback is deactivated (Not Active). For PDH loopback, see Figure 729. For SDH loopback, see Figure 730.
Page 975 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual OAM Remote Loopback 66 OAM Remote Loopback 66.1 Purpose The procedures in this chapter are used to perform an EFM OAM remote loopback. 66.2 General A loopback can be performed on an operational EFM OAM link. The following conditions must be satisfied in order to activate remote loopback: •...
Page 976: Figure 733 Eth Oam Configuration Window With Operational Link
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 OAM Remote Loopback WebEML User Manual Figure 733 ETH OAM Configuration window with operational link 2. From the list, choose the interface that you need to create the loopback on. 3. In the Link OAM Loopback pane, choose the Start check box in the OAM Remote Loopback field.
Page 977: Figure 734 Eth Oam Configuration Window With Oam Remote Loopback
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual OAM Remote Loopback Figure 734 ETH OAM Configuration window with OAM Remote Loopback 2. In the Link OAM Loopback pane, choose the Stop check box in the OAM Remote Loopback field. 3.
Page 978 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 OAM Remote Loopback WebEML User Manual...
Page 979 67 Open and run performance monitoring 67.1 Purpose This chapter provides the procedures to open and run performance monitoring (PM) for the 9500 MPR. 67.2 General The Performance Monitoring Suite provides the ability to gather statistical data on Ethernet or Radio ports and RSL History to determine the quality level of ports over time.
Page 980: Figure 735 Pm Tool Icon
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual The 24-h PM data is always stored in the History Data report. Default and Elaborated PM counters are available. Default counters are collected on the NE. Elaborated counters are calculated on the PC. 67.3 Procedures This section provides the following procedures: •...
Page 981: Figure 736 Acknowledgement Of Authorization Dialog Box
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring Figure 736 Acknowledgement of Authorization dialog box 2. Click on the Accept button. The Performance Monitoring Tool opens; see Figure 737. Figure 737 Performance Monitoring Tool window...
Page 982: Figure 738 Ethernet Port Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To run PM on an Ethernet port 1. From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane. 2. From the Ethernet Statistics pane, expand the card tree and select the Ethernet port on which to run Ethernet PM.
Page 983: Figure 739 Compression Gain Statistics Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring To run PM for compression gain statistics 1. From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane. 2. Click on the Bird’s Eye View icon in the toolbar to switch to Bird’s Eye View. 3.
Page 984: Figure 740 Radio Qos Ethernet Port Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To run PM on a radio Ethernet port 1. From the resource tree area, select the Ethernet Statistics pane. 2. From the Ethernet Statistics pane, select the radio card on which to run radio Ethernet PM.
Page 985 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring Note: If the Ethernet throughput percentage over the radio interface (for aggregate and QoS queues) is above 100% and the TDF (Total Discarded Frames) counter is clear, check whether the TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/SDH2SDH data flows cross-connected to the radio interface are experiencing any of the following: •Loss of CES alarm at both or either side of the TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/...
Page 986 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To run PM on an L1 radio LAG port Note: Measured throughput on an L1 LAG includes both TDM2TDM/TDM2ETH/ SDH2SDH data flow and Ethernet traffic. 1.
Page 987: Figure 741 Configure Ethernet Counters For L1 Radio Lag Pm With Easv2
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring Figure 741 Configure Ethernet counters for L1 radio LAG PM with EASv2 4. Click Stopped to start the monitoring.
Page 988: Figure 742 Radio Port Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To run PM on a radio port 1. From the resource tree area, select the Radio PM pane. 2. From the Radio PM pane, select radio port on which to run radio PM. 3.
Page 989 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring To run Adaptive Modulation PM on a radio port Note: In case of usage of analog measurement the maximum suggested number of Analog measurement windows that can be opened at the same time is 12. 1.
Page 990: Figure 743 Adaptive Modulation Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual Figure 743 Adaptive Modulation PM...
Page 991: Figure 744 Pdh Port Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring To run PM on a PDH port 1. From the resource tree area, select the PDH PM pane. 2. From the PDH PM pane, expand the PDH card on which to run PDH PM. 3.
Page 992: Figure 745 Sdh Port Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To run PM on an SDH port 1. From the resource tree area, select the SDH PM pane. 2. From the SDH PM pane, expand the SDHACC card. 3.
Page 993: Figure 746 Rsl History Pm
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring To run RSL History PM 1. From the resource tree area, select RSL History. 2. From the RSL History pane, select a radio port on which to run RSL History PM. 3.
Page 994: Figure 747 Threshold Editor Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To create a TCA threshold 1. From the Toolbar Area, select the Threshold Editor icon. The Threshold Editor window opens; see Figure 747. Figure 747 Threshold Editor window 2.
Page 995 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring To modify a TCA threshold 1. Open the Threshold Editor. The Thresholds Editor window opens. 2. From the Available Thresholds panel, select the radio PM type tab: SDH PM, PDH PM, Radio PM Hop, or Radio PM Link.
Page 996 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual Note: In the Hop threshold table, thresholds #1 and #4 are default thresholds. In the Link threshold table, thresholds #1 and #3 are default thresholds. These default thresholds cannot be deleted.
Page 997: Figure 748 Assign Pm Threshold Configuration Window
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Open and run performance monitoring To assign TCA Alarm thresholds to Radio Channels/Link 1. From the resource tree area, select the Radio PM pane. 2. From the Radio PM pane, select the radio port to assign a TCA threshold. 3.
Page 998 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Open and run performance monitoring WebEML User Manual To view PM data 1. In the resource tree area, select the PM type to view: Ethernet Statistics, Radio PM, Adaptive Modulation PM, PDH PM, SDH PM, or RSL History. 2.
Page 999: Perform Protection Switching
Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 WebEML User Manual Perform protection switching 68 Perform protection switching 68.1 Purpose This chapter provides the instructions to perform Protection Switching for the 9500 MPR. Protection switching is available for equipment/radio channel entities when correctly equipped and configured.
Page 1000 Release 7.0.0 3DB 19286 ACAA Issue 01 Perform protection switching WebEML User Manual Note: The SDH 1+1 EPS protection type is not-revertive and can’t be changed. Note: For radios configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, EPS protection switching criteria provisioning is not supported. the restoration criteria selected for HSB-TPS is applied to EPS automatically.

Nokia 9500 MPR User Manual

Preface

1 Safety Awareness

High-Level Procedures

2 High-Level Procedure for E1/DS1 Provisioning

3 High-Level Procedure for E1/DS1 Deprovisioning

4 High-Level Procedure for DS3 Provisioning

5 High-Level Procedure for DS3 Deprovisioning

6 High-Level Procedure for Ethernet Provisioning

7 High-Level Procedure for Ethernet Deprovisioning

8 High-Level Procedure for Ethernet LAG Provisioning

9 High-Level Procedure for SDH Provisioning

10 High-Level Procedure for SDH Deprovisioning

11 High-Level Procedure for Ethernet Ring Protection Management

12 High-Level Procedure for Using Web Server

System Administration

13 Log in to and out of System

14 Administer Community String

15 Administer External Alarm Points on an Auxiliary Card

16 Administer External Alarm Points on an MSS-1 or

Enhanced Fan Card

17 Administer In-Band TMN VLAN Port

18 Administer Network Configuration

19 Administer Qos Configuration

20 Administer Software License

21 Administer System Date and Time

22 Administer System Settings

23 Administer VLAN Configuration

24 Local Access Control Management

25 MIB Database Management (Backup and Restore)

26 Use the Ethernet Features Shell

27 Perform a Software Reset

28 Configure EFM OAM

User Administration

29 Administer NE List

30 Administer User Profiles

31 Change Password

System Information

32 View Alarms

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Nokia 9500 MPR

Summary of Contents for Nokia 9500 MPR